home *** CD-ROM | disk | FTP | other *** search
Text File | 1988-02-28 | 533.9 KB | 9,892 lines |
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- +=================================================+ +=================================================+
- | A Guide To PibTerm v4.1 At Northwestern | | A Guide To PibTerm v4.1 At Northwestern |
- +=================================================+ +=================================================+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Copyright (c) February, 1988 by Philip R. Burns Copyright (c) February, 1988 by Philip R. Burns
-
-
- i
-
-
-
- What Is PibTerm? ...................................... 1 What Is PibTerm? ...................................... 1
- What Is Terminal Emulation? ........................... 1 What Is Terminal Emulation? ........................... 1
- What is a terminal? ............................... 1
- Types of terminals ................................ 1
- Dumb .......................................... 1
- Smart ......................................... 1
- Terminals emulated by PibTerm ..................... 1
- Dec VT100 -- for all ACNS mainframe use ....... 1
- Tektronix 4010 -- for graphics display ........ 1
- What Is A File Transfer? .............................. 2 What Is A File Transfer? .............................. 2
- PibTerm Features ...................................... 2 PibTerm Features ...................................... 2
- Dialing Directory ................................. 3
- Menu Selection .................................... 4
- Getting A Copy Of PibTerm ............................. 4 Getting A Copy Of PibTerm ............................. 4
- System Requirements For PibTerm ....................... 4 System Requirements For PibTerm ....................... 4
- Installing PibTerm .................................... 4 Installing PibTerm .................................... 4
- Using the INSTALL program ......................... 5
- Starting Up PibTerm ................................... 5 Starting Up PibTerm ................................... 5
- PibTerm Commands ...................................... 6 PibTerm Commands ...................................... 6
- PibTerm commands have form <ALT>letter ............ 6
- Displaying <ALT>key commands -- <ALT>I ........... 6
- Making Menu Selections ................................ 6 Making Menu Selections ................................ 6
- Using arrow keys to move within a menu ............ 6
- Using Enter to select a menu item ................. 6
- Using ESC to exit a menu .......................... 7
- Using A Mouse With PibTerm ............................ 7 Using A Mouse With PibTerm ............................ 7
- Why use a mouse ................................... 7
- Loading the mouse menu PIBTERM.MNU ................ 7
- Customizing the mouse menu in PIBTERM.DEF ......... 7
- What the mouse buttons do ......................... 7
- Left button -- select menu item ............... 8
- Right button -- Enter ......................... 8
- Both buttons together -- ESC .................. 8
- Using mouse in place of arrow keys ............ 8
- What the mouse menu looks like .................... 8
- Changing PibTerm Parameters -- <ALT>P ................. 8 Changing PibTerm Parameters -- <ALT>P ................. 8
- The PIBTERM.CNF configuration file ................ 9
- Primary parameter display using <ALT>P ............ 10
- Brief description of <ALT>P submenus .............. 10
- Communications parameters submenu ................. 11
- Baud rate sub-sub-menu ............................ 12
- Writing a new parameter file ...................... 13
- Reading a new parameter file ...................... 13
- Keyboard Editing ...................................... 14 Keyboard Editing ...................................... 14
- Editing an existing value ......................... 14
- Insert mode versus overstrike mode ................ 15
- Using the <CTRL>P key to enter control codes ...... 15
- Using the ^ key to enter control codes ............ 15
- Using DOS For Keyboard Editing .................... 16
- Connecting To A Remote System With PibTerm ............ 16 Connecting To A Remote System With PibTerm ............ 16
- Hard-wired access ................................. 16
- Modem access ...................................... 16
- Types of modems ................................... 16
-
-
- ii
-
-
- Acoustic coupler modem ........................ 16
- Direct connect modem .......................... 17
- Higher transmission speeds ................ 17
- Hayes "AT" command set .................... 17
- DIU access ........................................ 17
- Communications Parameters ............................. 17 Communications Parameters ............................. 17
- Characters, bits, and bytes ....................... 17
- Serial communications ............................. 18
- Asynchronous communications ................... 18
- Synchronous communications .................... 18
- Baud Rate or Speed of connection .................. 18
- Data Bits ......................................... 18
- ASCII character set ........................... 18
- Extended Ascii character set .................. 19
- EBCDIC character set .......................... 19
- Parity ............................................ 19
- Parity Check .................................. 19
- Space Parity .............................. 19
- Mark Parity ............................... 19
- Even Parity ............................... 19
- Odd Parity ................................ 19
- No Parity ................................. 20
- Stop Bits ......................................... 20
- Parameters For Commonly Accessed Systems .............. 20 Parameters For Commonly Accessed Systems .............. 20
- Parameters for ACNS mainframes .................... 20
- Parameters for micro-to-micro connections ......... 20
- Changing parameters quickly -- <ALT>N ............. 21
- Automatic dialing speed adjustments ........... 21
- Local versus Remote Echo -- <ALT>E ................ 21
- Duplicate or "stuttered" characters ........... 22
- Flow Control .......................................... 22 Flow Control .......................................... 22
- Xon/Xoff .......................................... 22
- Clear-to-send (CTS/RTS) ........................... 23
- Dataset Ready (DSR/DTR) ........................... 23
- Setting Up A Modem For Use With PibTerm ............... 23 Setting Up A Modem For Use With PibTerm ............... 23
- Carrier Detect Line ............................... 24
- Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Line .................... 24
- MNP error correction .............................. 25
- Disabling MNP on Hayes-compatible modems ...... 25
- Hard-Wired Access ................................. 26
- Gaining attention of the PACX ................. 26
- Sending a break using <ALT>B .............. 26
- Indicating a connection is hard-wired ......... 26
- DIU/AILU Access ................................... 26
- Setting Up And Using The Dialing Directory ............ 27 Setting Up And Using The Dialing Directory ............ 27
- Dialing directory file PIBTERM.FON ................ 27
- Dialing directory is memory resident .............. 27
- Sections of the dialing directory ................. 29
- Revising a dialing entry .......................... 32
- Dialing prefixes and suffixes ..................... 32
- Default prefix and suffix ..................... 33
- Redialing the last number dialed -- <ALT>Q ........ 34
- Dialing a list of numbers ......................... 34
- Using The Short Dialing Prompt .................... 34
-
-
- iii
-
-
- Dialing A System By Name .......................... 35
- Backing up PIBTERM.FON ............................ 35
- Automatic Dialing Speed Adjustment ................ 36
- Modem Pools ....................................... 36
- Preventing line drops during dialing attempts . 37
- Setting carrier detect always high ............ 37
- Dialing Problems .................................. 38
- Modem timeout too small ....................... 38
- Making sure the port is correct ............... 38
- Touch-Tone versus Rotary Dial lines ........... 38
- Carrier detect line problems .................. 39
- Characters dropped when dialing ............... 39
- VT100 Terminal Emulation .............................. 41 VT100 Terminal Emulation .............................. 41
- VT100 is default .................................. 41
- Changes required for different ACNS systems ....... 41
- Backspace key ................................. 41
- Keypad definitions ............................ 41
- Scripts to set the parameters ................. 41
- The Backspace key ................................. 41
- VT100 keypad definitions .......................... 42
- Types of IBM keyboards ........................ 42
- Loading a function key definition file ........ 43
- Using PibTerm with VAX/VMS .................... 43
- Using PibTerm with IBM CMS .................... 46
- Using PibTerm with NOS ........................ 47
- Automatic Loading of Function Key Definitions ..... 48
- Switching Between VT100 Keypad Modes .............. 48
- The PibTerm Status Line ........................... 49
- The Scroll Lock Key ............................... 51
- Resetting the Terminal -- <SHIFT>TAB .............. 51
- Clearing the Screen -- <ALT>C ..................... 51
- What Doesn't Work in VT100 emulation .............. 51
- 132 column mode ............................... 51
- Double high, double wide characters ........... 51
- 132 column support with ATI EGA/VGA ....... 52
- Simulated double size characters .......... 52
- Other Text Terminal Emulation Modes ................... 52 Other Text Terminal Emulation Modes ................... 52
- ADM3a, ADM5, TV925, VT52 .......................... 52
- ANSI/BBS .......................................... 52
- Dumb terminal mode ................................ 52
- Dumb terminal output through MS DOS ........... 52
- Gossip Mode ........................................... 53 Gossip Mode ........................................... 53
- Split-screen mode ................................. 53
- Line mode versus character mode ................... 53
- Gossip mode for transferring files ................ 54
- Adding line feeds ................................. 54
- Graphics Terminal Emulation -- Tek 4010 ............... 54 Graphics Terminal Emulation -- Tek 4010 ............... 54
- File Transfers ........................................ 55 File Transfers ........................................ 55
- How Protocols Work ................................ 56
- Kermit ............................................ 57
- Performance Considerations With Kermit ........ 58
- Types of Files .................................... 59
- Text files .................................... 59
- Binary files .................................. 59
-
-
- iv
-
-
- Uploading versus Downloading ...................... 60
- <ALT>S -- Sending a file ...................... 60
- <ALT>R -- Receiving a file .................... 60
- Using the Kermit protocol ......................... 60
- Steps in performing a Kermit transfer ............. 60
- Getting files on the Cyber .................... 60
- Executing Kermit on the mainframe ............. 60
- Indicating the type of file to be transferred. 60
- SET FILE BINARY for SPSSX export files. ... 61
- Turning on the long blocks option ............. 61
- Placing the remote Kermit in server mode. ..... 61
- Asking PibTerm to receive a file -- PgDn ...... 61
- Asking PibTerm to send a file -- PgUp ......... 61
- Using <ALT>R to receive a file ............ 62
- Using <ALT>S to send a file ............... 62
- Selecting a file transfer protocol. ....... 62
- Selecting the file name to be transmitted ..... 63
- Getting out of Kermit server mode ............. 63
- Quitting Kermit ............................... 63
- Saving files on the Cyber ..................... 64
- Kermit autodownload ............................... 64
- Kermit between IBM PC and Apple Macintosh ......... 64
- Kermit Protocol Parameters ........................ 66
- Setting a download directory ...................... 66
- Transfer Statistics ............................... 66
- File Transfer Trouble-Shooting With Kermit ............ 67 File Transfer Trouble-Shooting With Kermit ............ 67
- File transfer never begins ........................ 67
- Kermit aborts during a transfer ................... 68
- Host doesn't respond to FINISH server request ..... 69
- Other File Transfer Protocols ......................... 70 Other File Transfer Protocols ......................... 70
- Xmodem family ..................................... 70
- Xmodem ........................................ 70
- Xmodem 1K ..................................... 71
- Modem7 ........................................ 71
- Ymodem ........................................ 71
- Telink protocol ............................... 72
- Mahoney BBS batch protocol .................... 72
- Other Xmodem family protocols ................. 73
- Zmodem ............................................ 73
- DSZ program ................................... 73
- Autodownload with Zmodem ...................... 74
- Compuserve B Protocol ............................. 74
- Automatic File Name Extraction For Transfers ...... 75
- Non-Protocol File Transfers ........................... 75 Non-Protocol File Transfers ........................... 75
- External File Transfer Protocols ...................... 78 External File Transfer Protocols ...................... 78
- Steps in Adding a User-Defined Protocol ........... 78
- Step 1 -- Find a suitable auxilliary program. . 78
- Step 2 -- Add protocol to configuration file. . 79
- Step 3 -- Write batch files for send/receive .. 82
- Hanging Up The Phone -- <ALT>H ........................ 83 Hanging Up The Phone -- <ALT>H ........................ 83
- Exiting PibTerm -- <ALT>X ............................. 83 Exiting PibTerm -- <ALT>X ............................. 83
- On Being A Host -- <ALT>W ............................. 84 On Being A Host -- <ALT>W ............................. 84
- What is host mode? ................................ 84
- Single-user and multiple-user access .............. 84
-
-
- v
-
-
- Using Host Mode In Single User Access ................. 84 Using Host Mode In Single User Access ................. 84
- Entering a name and password ...................... 85
- Superusers versus ordinary users .................. 85
- Initial host mode messages ........................ 85
- The status line in host mode ...................... 85
- Starting a host-mode session ...................... 86
- Welcome message in host mode ...................... 86
- Entering user name and password ................... 87
- Main host-mode menu ............................... 87
- Gossip mode ................................... 88
- Host mode file transfer menu ...................... 89
- What programs can be executed remotely ............ 89
- Alternate CTTY drivers ............................ 89
- Setting up multiple-user host mode .................... 90 Setting up multiple-user host mode .................... 90
- Scripts -- Tailored Task Handling ..................... 91 Scripts -- Tailored Task Handling ..................... 91
- The script language -- a programming language ..... 91
- PibTerm Script Language Reference Guide ....... 92
- A sample script -- logging into the Vax ........... 92
- SText -- send text to remote system ........... 92
- WaitString -- wait for text from remote system 93
- Repeat/Until loop ............................. 93
- Executing a script ................................ 94
- Terminating script execution -- <ALT>X ............ 94
- Security considerations with login scripts ........ 94
- Script learn feature .............................. 95
- Learning a script to log into the ACNS Vax .... 95
- Script Memory Problems ............................ 97
- Unloading scripts from memory ................. 98
- Another Sample Script -- Dialing By Name .......... 98
- Access To The Operating System -- <ALT>J .............. 101 Access To The Operating System -- <ALT>J .............. 101
- Manipulating DOS Files From PibTerm -- <ALT>F ......... 102 Manipulating DOS Files From PibTerm -- <ALT>F ......... 102
- Active directory change ........................... 102
- Copy file ......................................... 102
- Directory display ................................. 102
- Editing a file .................................... 102
- Free space on drive ............................... 102
- Logged drive change ............................... 102
- Print a file ...................................... 102
- View a file ....................................... 102
- Zap (erase) a file ................................ 102
- Editing a file ........................................ 103 Editing a file ........................................ 103
- Maximum size file which can be edited ............. 104
- Editing Commands .................................. 104
- Cursor Movement ............................... 104
- Insert and Delete ............................. 105
- Block Commands ................................ 105
- Search and Replace ............................ 105
- Quitting the Editor ........................... 106
- Miscellaneous ................................. 106
- Invoking an External Editor ....................... 106
- Viewing a file ........................................ 107 Viewing a file ........................................ 107
- Invoking an External File Viewer .................. 108
- Defining Function Keys -- <ALT>K ...................... 109 Defining Function Keys -- <ALT>K ...................... 109
- Displaying current key definitions ................ 109
-
-
- vi
-
-
- Reading key definitions from a file ............... 109
- Entering key definitions at keyboard .............. 110
- Requesting extended keypad handling ............... 111
- Writing key definitions to a file ................. 111
- Quitting key definition mode ...................... 112
- Contents of key definition strings ................ 112
- Intercharacter Delays in Function Key Definitions . 113
- Attaching PibTerm commands to function keys ....... 113
- Attaching a Script to a Function Key .............. 114
- Setting a function key subdirectory ............... 114
- Session Logging ....................................... 115 Session Logging ....................................... 115
- Logging session to printer -- <ALT>L .............. 115
- Printer setup string .......................... 115
- Capture session to disk -- <ALT>O ................. 115
- Edited and unedited captures .................. 116
- Special information lines ..................... 116
- Activating PIBTERM.LOG file ....................... 116
- Screen Dumps Using <ALT>U ............................. 116 Screen Dumps Using <ALT>U ............................. 116
- Text images to file SCRNDUMP.DAT .................. 116
- Tek 4010 images to file GSCRNDUM.DAT .............. 117
- Scanning the Review Buffer -- <ALT>V .................. 117 Scanning the Review Buffer -- <ALT>V .................. 117
- Changing review buffer size ....................... 117
- Moving around in the review buffer ................ 117
- Mute Mode -- <ALT>M ................................... 118 Mute Mode -- <ALT>M ................................... 118
- ANSI/BBS music .................................... 118
- Host mode GOSSIP .................................. 118
- Translate Table -- <ALT>T ............................. 118 Translate Table -- <ALT>T ............................. 118
- Editing A Line On The Screen -- <ALT>A ................ 118 Editing A Line On The Screen -- <ALT>A ................ 118
- Displaying Session Timers -- <ALT>Y ................... 119 Displaying Session Timers -- <ALT>Y ................... 119
- Finding An Area Code -- <ALT>Z ........................ 120 Finding An Area Code -- <ALT>Z ........................ 120
- PibTerm Program Parameters ............................ 120 PibTerm Program Parameters ............................ 120
- Speeding Up PibTerm Access ............................ 121 Speeding Up PibTerm Access ............................ 121
- Placing PibTerm files on a RAM disk ............... 121
- Using expanded memory for PibTerm overlay file .... 121
- Cutting down size of dialing directory ............ 121
- Changing Colors in PibTerm ............................ 121 Changing Colors in PibTerm ............................ 121
- VT100 colors ...................................... 122
- Changing Screen Display Size on EGA/VGA Adapters ...... 122 Changing Screen Display Size on EGA/VGA Adapters ...... 122
- Command Line Mode ..................................... 123 Command Line Mode ..................................... 123
- Command mode key definition ....................... 123
- Script Commands allowed in command line mode ...... 123
- PibTerm And MultiTasking Software ..................... 124 PibTerm And MultiTasking Software ..................... 124
- Supported multitaskers ............................ 124
- PIBTERM.DVP file for DesqView ................. 125
- TASKVIEW.NOT file for TaskView ................ 125
- Turning off direct screen writes .................. 125
- Programs Which Conflict With PibTerm .................. 125 Programs Which Conflict With PibTerm .................. 125
- General Trouble-Shooting Hints ........................ 126 General Trouble-Shooting Hints ........................ 126
- PibTerm hangs upon startup ........................ 126
- PibTerm doesn't clear menus correctly ............. 127
- Overlay file not found. ........................... 127
- No communications ................................. 127
- Jump to DOS fails ................................. 129
- Communications proceed, but VERY slowly. .......... 129
-
-
- vii
-
-
- Screen display "snows" badly ...................... 130
- Many characters dropped in screen display. ........ 130
- Saving changed parameters ......................... 131
- A Final Word From The Author .......................... 131 A Final Word From The Author .......................... 131
- Appendix A -- Installing PibTerm ...................... 133 Appendix A -- Installing PibTerm ...................... 133
- Hard Disk Installation ............................ 133
- Single-floppy (>360K) system ...................... 136
- Dual-floppy system ................................ 138
- Single-floppy system, 360K only ................... 141
- Index ................................................. 143 Index ................................................. 143
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- What Is PibTerm? What Is PibTerm?
-
- PibTerm is a flexible terminal emulation and file
- transfer software package for the IBM/PC and compatible
- machines. PibTerm lets your PC emulate a VT100 terminal on
- both the Cyber and VAX. You can also perform Kermit
- protocol file transfers without exiting the program.
- PibTerm is fully menu driven.
-
- This guide provides an introduction to the use of PibTerm
- with the ACNS mainframe computers. You may also want to get
- two associated documents: the PibTerm Script Language PibTerm Script Language
- Reference Manual and the PibTerm Parameters Reference Reference Manual PibTerm Parameters Reference
- Manual. Manual
-
-
- What Is Terminal Emulation? What Is Terminal Emulation?
-
- A terminal is a peripheral device that allows access to a terminal
- computer system. Terminals generally have a screen or
- printer for displaying information and a keyboard for
- entering information. Different brands of terminals possess
- different attributes that are recognized by the host
- machine: for example, a specific keyboard layout or screen
- display format. Some terminals are "dumb:" they are slaves dumb
- of the host computer to which they are attached. A dumb
- terminal provides for simple input and output and cannot
- process information or transfer files. Most terminals
- nowadays are "smart:" they are capable of processing and smart
- storing information on their own tapes, disks, and printers.
-
- A microcomputer also has a display screen and a keyboard.
- These provide access to the built-in microprocessor. But it
- is also possible to use the microcomputer as a "smart"
- terminal because of the power of that microprocessor.
- Usually micro-computers are programmed to mimic or "emulate"
- one of the "real" dumb or smart terminal types in order to
- access another remote computer that is designed to work with
- that kind of terminal. Using a microcomputer to mimic or
- emulate a terminal in this way is called terminal emulation. emulate terminal emulation
-
- Pibterm effectively turns an IBM PC or compatible
- microcomputer into several different terminal types. Most
- importantly for use at Northwestern, PibTerm emulates a
- Digital Equipment Corporation VT100 terminal, which is the
- standard for all ACNS mainframe systems and many others as
- well. PibTerm also emulates other Dec, Televideo, and ADM
- terminals.
-
- In addition to these standard "text" terminals, PibTerm can
- emulate the display facilities of the Tektronix 4010
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 2 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 2
-
-
- graphics terminal. This allows you to preview graphics
- output from mainframe packages like DI 3000 or SAS/GRAPH on
- your microcomputer before sending the graphics output to a
- hardcopy plotter. You need a graphics display card and
- monitor to use Tektronix 4010 emulation.
-
-
- What Is A File Transfer? What Is A File Transfer?
-
- Data communication is the passing of information from point
- to point. Pibterm, regardless of all its other
- capabilities, would be of little value if it didn't provide
- for the safe and reliable transport of data files between
- computers. By providing access to standard file transfer
- protocols like Kermit and Xmodem (among many others), it not
- only satisfies this need but maximizes the number of host
- systems with which it can share file transfer capabilities.
-
-
- PibTerm Features PibTerm Features
-
- PibTerm sports many other features that may be of
- interest once you're comfortable with the basics:
-
- - A variety of file transfer protocols besides Kermit
- - Script file usage
- - DOS file manipulation without leaving PibTerm
- - Built-in full-screen editor for small files
- - Session logging to a disk or printer
- - Review buffer for current session
- - Host mode capabilities
- - Runs in background with popular multitasking software
-
- The Kermit protocol is standard for all ACNS machines, and
- for microcomputer to microcomputer transfers (for example,
- IBM PC to IBM PC or IBM PC to MacIntosh computers). But
- there are also many other transfer protocols in common use.
- The Christensen protocol -- often called the Xmodem protocol
- -- is very popular for file transfers between microcomputers
- (for example, Xmodem is the only transfer protocol supported
- by MacTerminal). PibTerm incorporates a variety of Xmodem-
- based protocols and also allows you to hook in externally-
- defined protocols. But for ACNS use, and most micro-to-
- micro transfers, all you'll need is Kermit.
-
- PibTerm provides a comprehensive script writing utility. A
- script is a series of commands to PibTerm which can be used
- to automate routine communications tasks like dialing into
- an ACNS system. See the section "Scripts -- Tailored Task
- Handling."
-
- PibTerm allows access to the DOS operating system from
- within a PibTerm session, so that you don't have to leave
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 3 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 3
-
-
- PibTerm to execute a DOS command. See the section "Access
- to the Operating System."
-
- PibTerm incorporates a full-screen editor so you can edit
- DOS files right from within PibTerm. See the section
- "Editing a file."
-
- PibTerm can record an entire session with a host computer on
- the printer or in a disk file. This is useful for keeping a
- record of what you did. See the section "Session logging."
-
- PibTerm records the last few lines while you're connected to
- a remote system in a special review buffer. You can scan
- and search this review buffer, or write it to disk. This is
- helpful for checking what commands you just typed but which
- scrolled off the screen, or for looking at the output of
- earlier commands. See the section "Scanning the review
- buffer."
-
- PibTerm can act as a host system, accepting calls from other
- computers, and provide remote DOS access and file transfer
- capabilities along with password security to protect your
- system from unauthorized callers. See the section "On Being
- a Host."
-
- PibTerm is designed to work effectively with several popular
- multitasking environments. This allows you to perform file
- transfers as a "background" process while you do other work
- on your PC. Supported multitasking environments are
- DoubleDos, DesqView, TopView, and TaskView. See the section
- "PibTerm and Multitasking Software" for more details.
-
-
- Dialing Directory Dialing Directory
-
- For convenience, PibTerm provides a dialing directory with
- two hundred entries. (You can have a smaller directory if
- you wish.) Each entry contains all the data communications
- information needed to complete a connection. A script may be
- assigned to each directory entry, and that script will be
- executed upon successful connection with the remote system.
- Thus, you can press one or two keys and PibTerm will dial
- the remote computer, establish a connection, log you in, and
- leave you ready to start work.
-
- PibTerm has a mechanism for using special long-distance
- dialing services, which frequently require you to prepend
- and or/append access codes to numbers you wish to call.
-
- The PibTerm release materials include a sample dialing
- directory which lists phone numbers for ACNS systems.
-
- For more information, see the section "Setting Up And Using
- The Dialing Directory."
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 4 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 4
-
-
-
-
- Menu Selection Menu Selection
-
- PibTerm is a menu-driven system. Once you start PibTerm,
- you'll be able to familiarize yourself with most of its
- capabilities by simply browsing through the menus. You can
- use a command-line form of control for PibTerm, but the
- menus are generally more convenient.
-
- You can also use a mouse to control PibTerm. A sample mouse
- menu setup for the Microsoft mouse is provided as part of
- the PibTerm release materials.
-
-
- Getting A Copy Of PibTerm Getting A Copy Of PibTerm
-
- Perhaps the nicest feature of all is that PibTerm is free
- software, with no charge for academic, not-for-profit, or
- personal use. You can get a copy of PibTerm by bringing in
- three formatted blank 5 1/4" MS DOS formatted diskettes to
- the Information Center in the Vogelback building on the
- Evanston Campus, or in the Chicago Campus Computer Facility
- in Wieboldt Hall.
-
-
- System Requirements For PibTerm System Requirements For PibTerm
-
- In order to run PibTerm, you need an IBM PC or clone system
- with at least 320K of RAM memory. You should have at least at least
- two 360K diskette drives, or one 720K diskette drive.
- Larger capacity disks (e.g., hard disks) are helpful. Your
- PC must be equipped with a serial port. If you intend to
- dial in using PibTerm, you will need a modem -- preferably a
- Hayes compatible "AT" command set modem. You must be
- running DOS 2.0 or later to use PibTerm.
-
- It is POSSIBLE to run PibTerm on a single 360K floppy
- diskette system, but we advise against it -- the floppy
- shuffle that results is annoying. If you have a full 640K
- of memory, then you can create a RAMDisk and use that as a
- second disk drive.
-
-
- Installing PibTerm Installing PibTerm
-
- PibTerm is released for use at Northwestern on three 5 1/4"
- MS DOS formatted diskettes. The first two diskettes contain
- the PibTerm program and configuration files, and the third
- diskette contains documentation. Included on the first
- PibTerm diskette is an installation program which assists
- you in setting up PibTerm on your machine. To install
- PibTerm on your machine, boot up DOS, and then place the
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 5 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 5
-
-
- first PibTerm diskette into drive A: on your PC. Then move
- to drive A: and execute the installation program by typing:
-
- A:
- INSTALL
-
- Follow the instructions that INSTALL displays and you should
- end up with a correctly installed PibTerm for your
- particular PC configuration.
-
- If you are not at Northwestern University then you did not
- get the special INSTALL and CONFIG programs. In this case,
- see Appendix A for instructions on how to install PibTerm on
- your machine.
-
-
- Starting Up PibTerm Starting Up PibTerm
-
- To execute PibTerm after you have installed it, just type
-
- PIBTERM
-
- at the DOS prompt. (There are optional command-line
- arguments for PibTerm -- see the section "PibTerm Command
- Line Arguments" for details.)
-
- PibTerm begins by reading its configuration files. During
- that process PibTerm tells you which configuration files are
- being read. Then PibTerm displays a notice indicating that
- it is ready for you to proceed:
-
-
- PibTerm Version 4.1 Production.
- Released February 26, 1988.
- Copyright (c) 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988 by Philip R. Burns.
- Hit Alt-I for command list.
-
-
- You may notice a different version number or release date.
- This is because PibTerm is constantly being updated and
- improved.
-
- Following the messages above may be another that indicates
- that your modem is being initialized:
-
- Modem initialization: ATZ|~ATX1|~ATS0=0|
-
- After initializing the modem, PibTerm may read in function
- key definition files, set the terminal type, and execute any
- defined start-up script.
-
- Finally, PibTerm is ready to accept your commands.
-
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 6 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 6
-
-
- PibTerm Commands PibTerm Commands
-
- All PibTerm keyboard commands are entered by holding down
- the <ALT> key and then pressing a letter key.
-
- Here is a complete list of PibTerm <ALT>-key commands:
-
- <ALT>A : Edit line on screen
- <ALT>B : Send a break
- <ALT>C : Clear screen
- <ALT>D : Dialing directory
- <ALT>E : Toggle local echo of characters to screen
- <ALT>F : DOS file manipulation, including editing
- <ALT>G : Script directory
- <ALT>H : Hang up the phone <ALT>H : Hang up the phone
- <ALT>I : Display list of PibTerm <ALT>-key commands <ALT>I : Display list of PibTerm <ALT>-key commands
- <ALT>J : Jump to DOS
- <ALT>K : Define special keys (to change function keys)
- <ALT>L : Toggle printer logging
- <ALT>M : Toggle mute mode
- <ALT>N : Change communications parameters
- <ALT>O : Toggle session capture to file
- <ALT>P : Parameters menu (to modify parameters)
- <ALT>Q : Redial last number dialed
- <ALT>R : Receive a file from another computer
- <ALT>S : Send a file to another computer
- <ALT>T : Define character translation mapping
- <ALT>U : Write current screen contents to file
- <ALT>V : View text which scrolled off screen
- <ALT>W : Enter host mode
- <ALT>X : Exit PibTerm (or end script execution) <ALT>X : Exit PibTerm (or end script execution)
- <ALT>Y : Display session timing information
- <ALT>Z : Search for a dialing area code
-
- You should learn the highlighted commands above first, since
- they are the most useful for getting help and leaving
- PibTerm if things go wrong.
-
-
- Displaying <ALT>-key commands -- <ALT>I Displaying <ALT>-key commands -- <ALT>I
-
- If you forget a particular <ALT>-key command, you can use
- the <ALT>I ("I-nformation") combination inside of PibTerm, I
- which produces a command list like the one above. Also
- displayed at <ALT>I is the PibTerm version number, which is
- useful information for consultants to know if you run into
- difficulties, and which allows you to determine if your copy
- of PibTerm is up-to-date or not.
-
-
- Making Menu Selections Making Menu Selections
-
- PibTerm is a menu-driven system. When you hit an <ALT>-key
- command, PibTerm displays a menu box on the screen, writing
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 7 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 7
-
-
- over the previous screen contents. You select an item from
- any specific menu by first highlighting it and then pressing
- the Return or Enter key. The highlighter is moved with the Return Enter
- aid of the up and down cursor keys (up arrow, down arrow)
- and the space bar. You can also hit the first character of
- a menu entry to select it.
-
- All menus may be exited by hitting the Escape key (usually
- called ESC on the keyboard). After you make a menu ESC
- selection, the menu itself disappears from the screen and
- the previous screen contents which were hidden by the menu
- are restored.
-
-
- Using A Mouse With PibTerm Using A Mouse With PibTerm
-
- Since PibTerm incorporates such a large number of menus and
- menu selections, you may find it convenient to use a mouse
- to streamline access to important menu and sub-menu items. A
- sample Microsoft mouse menu is provided as part of the
- PibTerm release materials. You can also use other mice, but
- you will have to write the mouse menu driver yourself.
-
- If you want to use the Microsoft mouse with PibTerm, you
- will need to load the mouse menu before invoking PibTerm.
- First, make sure you have correctly installed and configured
- the mouse hardware and software for your system. Second,
- install the PibTerm mouse menu by typing
-
- MENU PIBTERM.MNU
-
- at the DOS prompt. "MENU" is the Microsoft-supplied menu
- loading program which you will find included in the
- diskettes of software accompanying your mouse.
- "PIBTERM.MNU" is the PibTerm mouse menu driver included as PIBTERM.MNU
- part of the PibTerm release materials.
-
- The file PIBTERM.DEF contains the source for the menu PIBTERM.DEF
- definitions. You can alter PIBTERM.DEF to create your own
- customized mouse menu definitions for use with PibTerm.
- Use the Microsoft-supplied program MAKEMENU.COM to create a
- new mouse menu. See the Microsoft Mouse documentation for
- further details on modifying mouse menus.
-
- Once you've installed the mouse menu using the MENU
- program, you should invoke PibTerm as usual. From that
- point on, hitting the LEFT mouse button brings up the mouse LEFT
- menu. Hitting the RIGHT mouse button sends a carriage return RIGHT
- character to PibTerm. This has the same effect as hitting
- the Enter or Return keys on the keyboard. Hitting BOTH Enter Return BOTH
- mouse buttons together sends an escape character to PibTerm,
- and has the same effect as hitting the ESC key on the
- keyboard. You select a mouse menu item by hitting the RIGHT
- mouse button. To exit the mouse menu without selecting
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 8 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 8
-
-
- anything, move the mouse pointer to the top bar of the menu
- and hit the RIGHT mouse button.
-
- You can use the mouse to move up and down through PibTerm
- menus in place of hitting the up and down arrow keys on the
- keypad -- just physically move the mouse forward and
- backwards. You can also move the mouse from side to side
- horizontally in place of typing the left and right arrow
- keys. It takes a bit of practice to get familiar with just
- how much mouse movement you need. To select a PibTerm menu
- item, hit the RIGHT mouse button (which is the same as
- hitting the Enter or Return key). To exit a PibTerm menu,
- hit BOTH mouse buttons at the same time (which is the same
- as hitting the ESC key).
-
-
- Here is what the sample mouse menu looks like:
-
-
- ╔══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╗
- ║ PibTerm ║
- ╠══════════════╤══════════════╤══════════════╤══════════════╤══════════════╣
- ║ File Transfer│ Toggles │ DOS │ Dialing │ Goodies ║
- ╟--------------┼--------------┼--------------┼--------------┼--------------╢
- ║ Kermit Get │ BS sends BS │ Jump To Dos │ Dial │ Show Review ║
- ║ Kermit Rcv │ BS send DEL │ │ Redial │ Timers ║
- ║ Kermit Send │ Echo │ Change Dir │ Hang Up │ Translate ║
- ║ Kermit Finish│ LineFeeds │ Change Drive │ │ Edit Line ║
- ║ │ Muting │ Directory │ Change Port │ Area Codes ║
- ║ Receive File │ │ Free Space │ Change Speed │ Define Keys ║
- ║ Send File │ CTS │ │ │ Info ║
- ║ │ Xon/Xoff │ Quit │ Send Break │ Set Params ║
- ╠══════════════╪══════════════╪══════════════╪══════════════╪══════════════╣
- ║ File Actions │ Emulation │ Capture │ Scripts │ Screen ║
- ╟--------------┼--------------┼--------------┼--------------┼--------------╢
- ║ Copy File │ VT100 │ To File │ Execute │ Clear Screen ║
- ║ Delete File │ Tek 4010 │ To Log │ Learn │ Dump Screen ║
- ║ Edit File │ Gossip Mode │ To Printer │ Unload All │ Reset Term ║
- ║ Print File │ ANSI/BBS │ │ Exit │ Set Colors ║
- ║ View File │ Host │ │ │ VT100 Colors ║
- ╚══════════════╧══════════════╧══════════════╧══════════════╧══════════════╝
-
- This menu provides direct access to the most commonly used
- PibTerm features for ACNS access.
-
-
- Changing PibTerm Parameters -- <ALT>P Changing PibTerm Parameters -- <ALT>P
-
- PibTerm is a highly configurable program with over 200
- adjustable parameters. Don't worry, you usually HAVE to
- change only a few of them, and most of the important ones
- will be set up for you by default or by the INSTALL program.
- However, as you gain experience in using PibTerm, you will
- probably find a number of program parameters that you'd like
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 9 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 9
-
-
- to change to reflect your own particular needs. There are
- also some parameters which you must change depending upon
- what remote system you access. We will discuss those
- parameters later in the section on terminal emulation.
-
-
- The PIBTERM.CNF configuration file The PIBTERM.CNF configuration file
-
- <ALT>P allows you to modify program parameters. The values
- of these parameters are initially read from the
- configuration file PIBTERM.CNF. If PIBTERM.CNF does PIBTERM.CNF
- NOT exist when PibTerm is invoked, then PibTerm cycles
- through the menus in the <ALT>P series. (If you use the
- INSTALL program, then INSTALL creates a PIBTERM.CNF file for
- you.)
-
- The general format of each line of the PIBTERM.CNF file is:
-
- pa=value
-
- where pa is a two-letter name for a parameter, and value is pa value
- the value of the parameter.
-
- The meanings of all the parameters, along with detailed
- technical information about each of them, can be found in
- the "PibTerm Parameters Reference Manual."
-
- It is possible to edit PIBTERM.CNF with a text editor to
- make changes to PibTerm parameter values, but this is
- generally unnecessary since all changes can be made using
- the menus at <ALT>P from within PibTerm itself. (The only
- time it is necessary is if you have an incorrect serial port
- number specified. You can change the PO= parameter value in
- PIBTERM.CNF to fix this, or better, use the ACNS-supplied
- CONFIG.COM program to respecify the correct serial port.)
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 10 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 10
-
-
-
- Primary parameter display using <ALT>P Primary parameter display using <ALT>P
-
- This is what PibTerm displays when you hit <ALT>P:
-
- ╒[ Set Parameters: ]═══════╕
- │ C)ommunications │
- │ F)ile transfer │
- │ H)ost mode │
- │ I)nput │
- │ K)ermit │
- │ M)odem and dialing │
- │ O)dds and ends │
- │ P)aths for special files │
- │ R)ead config file │
- │ T)erminal emulation │
- │ V)ideo mode and colors │
- │ W)rite config file │
- │ Q)uit setup │
- ╘═══════════════════════════╛
-
- Selecting each of the menu entries in turn calls up
- a submenu which allows you to set the corresponding program
- parameters. (Hitting Q or the ESC key takes you out of Q ESC
- <ALT>P mode.)
-
-
- Brief description of <ALT>P submenus Brief description of <ALT>P submenus
-
- Here is a brief description of what each of the <ALT>P
- submenus refers to:
-
- C)ommunications: Communications-related parameters C)ommunications:
- like serial port hardware settings,
- flow control and serial port buffer
- sizes.
-
- F)ile transfer: File transfer-related parameters F)ile transfer:
- like the default file transfer
- protocol and external protocol
- definitions.
-
- H)ost mode: Host mode parameters like upload H)ost mode:
- and download paths for host mode.
-
- I)nput: Keyboard-related parameters like I)nput:
- the type of keyboard, command mode
- key definition, and use of extended
- keypad definitions.
-
- K)ermit: Kermit protocol parameter settings K)ermit:
- including packet sizes and options
- like sliding windows and long
- blocks.
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 11 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 11
-
-
-
- M)odem and dialing: Parameters related to dialing like M)odem and dialing:
- modem initialization, modem dialing
- command, dialing timeout.
-
- O)dds and ends: Parameters which don't quite fit O)dds and ends:
- anyplace else appear here.
-
- P)aths for files: Paths for script directory, P)aths for files:
- function key directory.
-
- R)ead config file: Reads in a configuration file. R)ead config file:
-
- T)erminal: Terminal parameters like emulation T)erminal:
- type, VT100 settings, status line
- options.
-
- V)ideo mode: Parameters to choose display type, V)ideo mode:
- colors, BIOS versus direct screen
- memory writes.
-
- W)rite config file: Writes a configuration file. W)rite config file:
-
-
- Example: C)ommunication parameters submenu Example: C)ommunication parameters submenu
-
- As an example, assume that we select C)ommunications. The
- following submenu box appears:
-
- ╒[ Communications parameters ]═════════════════════════════════════════════════╕
- │ │
- │ a) Serial port : 2 │
- │ b) Baud rate : 2400 │
- │ c) Parity : E (Ascii 69) │
- │ d) Data bits : 7 │
- │ e) Stop bits : 1 │
- │ f) Add linefeeds to incoming CRs : No │
- │ g) Add linefeeds to outgping CRs : No │
- │ h) Check Clear To Send : No │
- │ i) Check Data Set Ready : No │
- │ j) Hard-wired connection : No │
- │ k) Break length in 1/100 seconds : 50 │
- │ l) Drop DTR at end : No │
- │ m) Close port on jump to DOS : Yes │
- │ n) Do XON/XOFF flow control : Yes │
- │ o) Strip high bit in terminal mode : No │
- │ p) Comm buffer input size : 4096 │
- │ q) Comm buffer output size : 1200 │
- │ r) Local echo : No │
- │ s) Serial port hardware settings │
- │ │
- │ Enter letter of item to revise or hit ESC to quit: │
- ╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 12 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 12
-
-
- This appears to be a formidable list of communications
- parameters, but most of them you will never have to change.
- Note that PibTerm displays the current values of all the
- parameters.
-
- Suppose you want to change the baud rate or speed of the baud rate speed
- connection. (We'll discuss what baud rate means in the
- section on communications parameters later on.) Select b to b
- select the baud rate display. You can select b by hitting b
- the letter b on the keyboard, or using the arrows (or the
- mouse) to cycle through the letter entries and then hitting
- the Return key (or right button on the mouse). A baud rate Return
- sub-sub-menu appears, overwriting the right-hand part of the
- C)ommunications menu:
-
- ╒[ Communications parameters ]═════════════════════════════════════════════════╕
- │ │
- │ a) Serial port : 2 │
- │ b) Baud rate : 2400 │
- │ c) Parity : E (Ascii 69) │
- │ d) Data bits : 7 │
- │ e) Stop bits : 1 │
- │ f) Add linefeeds to incoming CRs : No │
- │ g) Add linefeeds to outgoing CRs : No ╒[ Baud Rate: ]╕ │ ╒[ Baud Rate: ]╕
- │ h) Check Clear To Send : No │ a) 110 │ │ │ │
- │ i) Check Data Set Ready : No │ b) 150 │ │ │ │
- │ j) Hard-wired connection : No │ c) 300 │ │ │ │
- │ k) Break length in 1/100 seconds : 50 │ d) 600 │ │ │ │
- │ l) Drop DTR at end : No │ e) 1200 │ │ │ │
- │ m) Close port on jump to DOS : Yes │ f) 2400 │ │ │ f) 2400 │
- │ n) Do XON/XOFF flow control : Yes │ g) 4800 │ │ │ │
- │ o) Strip high bit in terminal mode : No │ h) 9600 │ │ │ │
- │ p) Comm buffer input size : 4096 │ i) 19200 │ │ │ │
- │ q) Comm buffer output size : 1200 │ j) 38400 │ │ │ │
- │ r) Local echo : No │ k) 57600 │ │ │ │
- │ s) Comm port hardware settings ╘═══════════════╛ │ ╘═══════════════╛
- │ │
- │ Enter letter of item to revise or hit ESC to quit: │
- ╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- The default baud rate will be highlighted in inverse video.
- You can either enter one of the letters to select a new baud
- rate, or use the arrow keys to move to a new baud rate and
- then hit the enter key. For example, hitting the "h" key
- would select 9600 baud.
-
- Once you've selected the new baud rate, the baud-rate sub-
- sub-menu disappears, putting you back at the C)ommunications
- sub-menu. You can hit the ESC or Enter keys to return to
- the top-level <ALT>P menu, and then hit the ESC or Enter key
- once again to remove the <ALT>P menu display.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 13 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 13
-
-
- You should look through the <ALT>P submenus to familiarize
- yourself with the location of parameters that you may need
- to change later on.
-
-
- Writing a new parameter file Writing a new parameter file
-
- Changes you make to the configuration parameters retain
- their effect only during the current PibTerm session. To
- make the changes permanent you need to write an updated
- configuration file. To do this, choose
-
- <ALT>P,
- W)rite config file.
-
- You'll see a prompt box that looks like this:
-
-
- ╒[ Write configuration file ]═══════════════════════════════╕
- │Enter configuration file name: │
- │>PIBTERM.CNF │
- │ │
- │ │
- ╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
-
- Since PIBTERM.CNF is the default configuration, and the one
- you'll most likely want to change, just hit the Enter key to
- save the revised parameter settings back to PIBTERM.CNF.
- Then the next time you enter PibTerm these revised settings
- will be used.
-
-
- Reading a new parameter file Reading a new parameter file
-
- You can read in a new parameter file if you choose
-
- <ALT>P,
- R)ead config file
-
- This is useful if you want to change several parameters at
- one time and you have previously prepared the new parameter
- file. You will be prompted for the name of the parameter
- file in the same way as for the "W)rite config file" above.
- You can most easily prepare the new file by entering
- PibTerm, making all the changes you want at <ALT>P submenus,
- and then using "W)rite config file" to create the new
- parameter file.
-
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 14 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 14
-
-
- Keyboard Editing Keyboard Editing
-
- Keypad editing is available for almost all keyboard
- input WHICH IS NOT BEING SENT TO A REMOTE SYSTEM. This
- includes input in the <ALT>P parameter setting section.
-
- To accomodate machines like laptops which may not
- conveniently provide the IBM-style keypad, editing
- facilities can be accessed using WordStar-like control
- keys.
-
- Here is a list of the control characters used (including IBM
- PC function keys):
-
- ^A Move back 1 word, nondestructive [Ctrl-LeftArrow]
- ^B Save current buffer in undo buffer
- ^D Move forward one [RightArrow]
- ^F Move forward 1 word [Ctrl-RightArrow]
- ^G Delete character forward [DEL]
- ^H Move back 1, destructive (same as ASCII BS) [BackSpace]
- ^J End of input; accept current text [Ctrl-Enter]
- ^L Look for char: reads character, advances cursor to match
- ^M End of input; accept current text [Enter]
- ^P Accept next character as-is (control character prefix)
- ^Q Move to beginning of line, nondestructive [Home]
- ^R Move to end of line [End]
- ^S Move back 1, nondestructive [LeftArrow]
- ^T Delete line forward cursor to end [Ctrl-End]
- ^U Copy undo buffer into current buffer (undo) [PgUp]
- ^V Insert on/off [INS]
- ^Y Delete line [PgDn]
- DEL Move back 1, destructive (same as ^H) (ASCII DEL)
- [Ctrl-BackSpace]
- ESC End of input; return null string as result.
-
- The "^" symbol preceding characters above means that you
- hold down the <CTRL> key while depressing the following
- letter.
-
- When string editing is in effect, these key definitions
- OVERRIDE any user-defined definitions for the keypad keys.
- (User key definitions are discussed later in the section
- "Defining function keys.") Striking any keypad key which is
- NOT one of the above editing keys elicits a beep from
- PibTerm, and nothing is entered into the string
- being edited.
-
- In some places -- particularly parameter entry -- PibTerm
- displays the previous string values and you can just edit
- them into new values, rather than having to re-type a
- completely new string. To edit an existing value, use one
- of the editing keys above to start things off (for example,
- the right arrow). If you just start typing a new value,
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 15 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 15
-
-
- then the previous value is cleared and the new one you type
- replaces it.
-
- You can choose to start editing in either insert mode (the insert mode
- default) or in overstrike mode. In overstrike mode, PibTerm overstrike mode
- replaces or overwrites the old characters with the new
- characters you type. In insert mode, the current characters
- are moved to the right and the new characters are inserted
- into the string.
-
- To set overstrike mode as the default, set the parameter at
-
- <ALT>P,
- I)nput,
- g) Start editing in insert mode
-
- to YES.
-
- You can switch from overstrike to insert mode and back again
- during the course of editing a string by typing ^V or by ^V
- hitting the Ins key. Ins
-
- PibTerm changes the cursor from an underline to a block
- whenever overstrike mode is in effect.
-
- You need to understand the role of the <CTRL>P key.
- Sometimes you want to enter one of the editing control codes
- defined above into a string you are defining. For example,
- suppose you want to enter the Ascii code for "delete" into a
- string. This is Ascii 127, which is defined by hitting the
- <CTRL>Backspace on the PC keyboard. Since delete is an
- editing key, if you just hit the <CTRL>Backspace key on the
- keyboard, a delete will NOT be inserted into the string you
- are defining, but instead the character at the cursor will
- be deleted. To get the actual delete character inserted
- into the string, hit <CTRL>P and THEN hit the
- <CTRL>Backspace key. Since the <CTRL>Backspace follows
- <CTRL>P, it is interpreted as a literal Ascii 127 delete
- character and inserted into the string.
-
- You can also insert control characters into a string by
- entering the "^" character followed by the letter
- corresponding to the control code. "^" is the Ascii caret
- character (usually <Shift>6 on PC keyboards), which is Ascii
- character 94. For example, to insert a literal Ascii
- backspace character into a string (Ascii 8), you can follow
- the procedure for entering a delete character above, but you
- hit the Backspace key on the PC's keyboard instead of
- <CTRL>Backspace. Or, you can enter the Ascii caret
- following by H: ^H.
-
- If you aren't familiar with Ascii, see the section "Data
- Bits" which discusses character sets.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 16 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 16
-
-
-
- Using DOS For Keyboard Editing Using DOS For Keyboard Editing
-
- Rather than using the PibTerm line editing facilities
- described above, you may prefer to use the standard DOS
- facilities for editing strings. (See your DOS manual for
- details.) You can do that by setting the parameter at
-
- <ALT>P,
- I)nput,
- h) Use DOS function $0A for input
-
- to YES.
-
- DOS does not pay attention to any windows that PibTerm has
- set, so the cursor location when you finally press Enter or Enter
- Return may not be correct. Don't worry, PibTerm will adjust Return
- as you type further.
-
- The principal reason for using DOS function $0A for string
- input rather than the standard PibTerm facilities is so that
- keyboard enhancers like Chris Dunford's CED and PCED will CED PCED
- work inside of PibTerm.
-
-
- Connecting To A Remote System With PibTerm Connecting To A Remote System With PibTerm
-
- There are several ways in which you can connect your PC to
- a remote computer system. The two most common ways of
- establishing a connection are through a direct hard-wired direct hard-wired
- connection or by phone through a modem. Both types of connection modem
- connections are made through a serial port in your PC. serial port
-
- With a hard-wired connection your PC is directly connected hard-wired
- via a cable to the host system. This is the way that PCs in
- the microcomputer labs on the Evanston campus are connected
- to the ACNS mainframes. This is also one way in which you
- can connect two microcomputers -- for example, an IBM PC and
- a Macintosh -- for purposes of transferring files from one
- machine to another.
-
- A modem translates the digital computer signals generated
- by your PC and the host computer into analog signals which
- can be transmitted through a phone line. You can use the
- dialing facilities of PibTerm to dial up a remote system and
- establish a connection.
-
- There are two kinds of modems in common use. The older
- style of modem is the acoustic coupler modem, which acoustic coupler modem
- communicates through the telephone handset. A microphone
- picks up tones from the handset speaker and translates them
- into the digital signals which can be understood by the
- receiving computer. The acoustic coupler modem also
- translates digital signals from the computer into audible
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 17 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 17
-
-
- tones, which are picked up by the telephone's microphone and
- sent out over the phone line. Acoustic coupler modems
- aren't used much anymore, but they are still useful in other
- countries where direct connect modems are illegal or can't
- be used effectively -- like in hotel rooms. Data
- transmission rates are quite slow for acoustic coupler
- modems: generally 30 characters per second or less.
-
- A direct connect modem by contrast plugs directly into a direct connect modem
- telephone outlet, bypassing the handset. This type of modem
- enables the computer to communicate directly through
- telephone lines without going through a telephone handset.
- Very high data transmission rates are possible: up to 1920
- characters per second using current technology. However,
- the most common direct connect modem speeds are 120 and 240
- characters per second.
-
- In addition to higher transmission speeds, direct connect
- modems also can process a variety of commands. Typical
- commands include hanging up the phone, dialing a phone
- number, and redialing a busy number. While the command sets
- for modems differ among brands, many modems accept the "AT"
- command set introduced by Hayes, a major manufacturer of
- modems. The Hayes command set is called the "AT" command
- set because nearly all the modem commands begin with the
- letters "AT." This AT command set is the industry standard,
- and PibTerm is designed to work with Hayes-compatible modems
- by default.
-
- With a digital phone system like NTS at Northwestern, it is
- possible to send digital signals directly over the phone
- line using a device called a Digital Interface Unit (DIU for Digital Interface Unit DIU
- short) or an Asynchronous Interface Line Unit (or AILU for Asynchronous Interface Line Unit AILU
- short). These devices take the place of modems, since the
- analog-to-digital conversion process isn't required.
- However, you must be on campus and using a campus phone line
- to use a DIU or AILU -- you can't use one from off-campus.
-
- Of course, you can also use a modem on a campus phone line.
-
-
- Communications Parameters Communications Parameters
-
- All information is exchanged between computers in terms of
- electronic signals which represent the basic binary values 0
- and 1, or ON and OFF. A series of six, seven, or eight
- consecutive binary values or bits forms a character or byte. bits character byte
- These characters are numeric encodings of letters, digits,
- symbols like the asterisk or left parenthesis, and control
- codes like line feeds or backspaces. Most computers use
- eight-bit characters -- this is true of the PC, the
- Macintosh, the Vax, and the IBM 4361. The Cyber under NOS
- uses several different character sizes: 6-bits; mixed 6 and
- 12 bits; or 12 bits. (This is a reflection of the age of
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 18 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 18
-
-
- the Cyber's technology under NOS.) Under NOS/VE, the Cyber
- uses eight bit characters.
-
- Basically, data communication consists of transferring
- characters -- expressed as a series of binary digits -- from
- one machine to another. There are a number of different
- ways in which these characters can be sent from one machine
- to another. The method supported by PibTerm is called
- asynchronous serial communication, in which one bit of a asynchronous serial communication
- character is transmitted at a time without regard to the
- amount of time which elapses between the sending of each
- bit. In serial communications, a start bit marks the
- beginning of a character; then follow the bits of the
- character itself, and finally a stop bit is sent marking the
- end of the character.
-
- Another popular form of data transmission is synchronous synchronous
- communication in which the timing of each data bit is communication
- precisely controlled. PibTerm does not support synchronous
- communication.
-
- There are a number of important communications parameters communications parameters
- which reflect the way in which this binary digital
- information is to be exchanged. These are:
-
- 1. Baud Rate Baud Rate
-
- The Baud Rate or Speed of the connection is an Baud Rate Speed
- indication of how fast the binary information is
- transferred between machines. Dividing the baud
- rate by ten gives (approximately) the maximum
- number of characters transferred between machines
- every second. The actual number of characters
- transferred may be much lower, as for example when
- the remote system is very busy.
-
- Common baud rates are 1200 and 2400 for modem
- access and 9600 for DIU, AILU, and hard-wired
- access.
-
- 2. Data Bits Data Bits
-
- As mentioned above, most machines use eight-bit
- characters to store information. However, many
- machines only use seven out of the eight bits to
- encode letters, numbers, symbols, and control
- codes. One of the most popular seven-bit encoding
- schemes is called ASCII, and that scheme is used ASCII
- by the Vax, the PC, and the Macintosh. Seven bits
- allow 128 different characters to be represented.
- The Cyber has a variety of encoding mechanisms,
- but for purposes of telecommunications, it uses
- seven-bit Ascii.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 19 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 19
-
-
- There are a number of extended ASCII character
- sets. For example, the PC uses an eight-bit
- extension of ASCII. So does the Macintosh, but it
- is a different extension. However, all the ASCII
- versions agree on the first 128 characters, so
- seven-bit ASCII is the most commonly used code set
- for data communications.
-
- IBM mainframes use an eight-bit encoding mechanism
- called EBCDIC. Eight bits provide for 256 EBCDIC
- different characters to be represented. However,
- the ACNS IBM 4361 has a front-end computer called
- the IBM 7171 protocol converter that translates
- seven-bit Ascii to eight-bit EBCDIC on-the-fly
- during a communications session.
-
- 3. Parity Parity
-
- If only seven out of eight bits are actually used
- when transmitting data, what is the eighth unused
- bit set to? The usual solution is to set the bit
- using a rule called a Parity Check. In this case Parity Check
- the eighth bit is called a parity bit. There are parity bit
- five different ways to set the parity bit, and
- PibTerm allows them all:
-
- 1. Space Parity Space Parity
-
- Always set the parity bit to zero.
-
- 2. Mark Parity Mark Parity
-
- Always set the parity bit to one.
-
- 3. Even Parity Even Parity
-
- Set the parity bit so that there are an
- even number of one bits in the resulting
- eight-bit character.
-
- 4. Odd Parity Odd Parity
-
- Set the parity bit so that there are an
- odd number of one bits in the resulting
- eight-bit character.
-
- 5. No parity No parity
-
- If the eighth bit is actually being used
- as a genuine data bit in transmission,
- its value should not be changed, and it
- should not be used as a parity bit. A no
- parity setting leaves the eighth bit
- untouched.
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 20 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 20
-
-
-
- Parity checking provides a very rudimentary method
- of detecting communications errors caused by noisy
- transmission lines. However, parity checking
- alone isn't sufficient to assure good
- communications, especially for file transfers.
- Parity checking doesn't address the problem of
- dropped or extra characters, or the problem of two
- bits within a character being transmitted
- incorrectly. Such problems require a more complex
- and higher-level approach. See the section on
- "File Transfers" for more information on error-
- checking methods.
-
- 4. Stop Bits Stop Bits
-
- The number of stop bits should be set to one for
- modern telecommunications equipment. This
- includes accessing the ACNS mainframes, as well as
- microcomputer-to-microcomputer access. Some older
- equipment required two stop bits.
-
-
- Parameters For Commonly Accessed Systems Parameters For Commonly Accessed Systems
-
- This section lists the communications settings to use with
- systems you are likely to encounter at Northwestern
- University.
-
- Parameters for ACNS mainframes Parameters for ACNS mainframes
-
- When accessing any of the ACNS mainframes, use the
- following communications parameters:
-
- Parity: Even
- Data Bits: 7
- Stop Bits: 1
- Baud Rate: 1200 or 2400 (modem)
- 9600 (hard-wired or DIU/AILU)
-
- Usually you set the baud rate to the maximum speed
- which your connection method allows. With a hard-wired
- connection or a DIU, you should be able to set the baud
- rate to 9600. With a modem, you should be able to set
- the baud rate to 1200 or 2400, depending upon your
- modem brand. However, if you encounter problems with
- line noise or dropped characters, you may want to try a
- lower speed.
-
- Parameters for micro-to-micro connections Parameters for micro-to-micro connections
-
- For microcomputer - to - microcomputer connections
- (including IBM PC to IBM PC and Macintosh to IBM PC)
- you generally use these settings:
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 21 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 21
-
-
-
- Parity: None
- Data Bits: 8
- Stop Bits: 1
- Baud Rate: 1200 or 2400 (modem)
- 9600 (hard-wired connection)
-
- Some microcomputer systems acting as remote bulletin
- board systems (BBSs) also allow 9600 baud access using
- special modems. These modems are not yet very popular
- because of their high cost and the lack of a widely
- accepted standard for 9600 baud modem transmissions.
-
-
- Changing parameters quickly -- <ALT>N Changing parameters quickly -- <ALT>N
-
- <ALT>N allows you to quickly change the three principal
- communications parameters all at once -- Baud Rate, Parity,
- and Data Bits. Hitting <ALT>N brings up the following
- display:
-
- ╒[ Change communications settings ]═══════════════════════════════════════════╕
- │ a) 300,8,N,1 f) 1200,8,N,1 k) 2400,8,N,1 p) 9600,8,N,1 u) 19200,8,N,1 │
- │ b) 300,7,E,1 g) 1200,7,E,1 l) 2400,7,E,1 q) 9600,7,E,1 v) 19200,7,E,1 │
- │ c) 300,7,O,1 h) 1200,7,O,1 m) 2400,7,O,1 r) 9600,7,O,1 w) 19200,7,O,1 │
- │ d) 300,7,M,1 i) 1200,7,M,1 n) 2400,7,M,1 s) 9600,7,M,1 x) 19200,7,M,1 │
- │ e) 300,7,S,1 j) 1200,7,S,1 o) 2400,7,S,1 t) 9600,7,S,1 y) 19200,7,S,1 │
- │ │
- │ Enter letter corresponding to new parameters or ESC to quit: │
- │ │
- ╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Press the letter corresponding to the new set of parameters
- you want.
-
- <ALT>N is useful with "dumb" modems that don't set the speed
- to match the system called automatically. However, most
- Hayes-compatible modems will set the speed to match that of
- the system called, and will inform PibTerm of the proper
- speed. PibTerm automatically adjusts the speed the PC
- expects in order to match what the modem reports. There are
- times when you may want to prevent PibTerm from doing this;
- see the section "Automatic Dialing Speed Adjustment" for
- details.
-
-
- Local versus Remote Echo -- <ALT>E Local versus Remote Echo -- <ALT>E
-
- Some remote systems echo back each character you send to
- that remote system. Such systems are called remote echo or remote echo
- full-duplex systems. Some systems do NOT echo back full-duplex
- characters you send, and therefore the terminal must display
- characters locally in order for you to see what you are
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 22 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 22
-
-
- typing. Systems which do not echo characters are called
- local echo or half-duplex systems. local echo half-duplex
-
- All of the ACNS systems provide remote echo. However, you
- may encounter other systems which do not echo characters.
- You'll know you've found one when the characters you type
- aren't displayed. To fix that in PibTerm, hit <ALT>E which <ALT>E
- toggles local echo. If local echo is ON, PibTerm will
- display the characters you send to the remote system as you
- type them.
-
- Even full duplex systems don't always echo back characters.
- For example, many systems don't echo what you type when you
- are typing in a password. This doesn't mean that you need to
- set local echo on.
-
- If after connecting to a remote system, the characters that
- you type are displayed twice, then you probably are
- accessing a remote-echoing system and you have also left
- PibTerm in local echo mode. This "stuttering" of characters
- appears something like this:
-
- Username: MMYYNNAAMMEE Username: MMYYNNAAMMEE
-
- where you simply typed MYNAME. MYNAME.
-
- You should turn off local echo by pressing <ALT>E.
-
- If you have turned off local echo and you still see
- stuttered characters, then most likely your modem is the
- culprit. Check your modem manual for the command or switch
- setting to suppress echoing. For many Hayes command set
- modems, you can type the following modem command to prevent
- the modem from echoing characters:
-
- ATE0 (ATE1 turns modem local echo back on) ATE0 ATE1
-
-
- Flow-Control Flow-Control
-
- There are times when two computers are communicating when it
- is necessary for one computer to tell the other to stop
- sending information. This can happen because the receiver
- is too busy to process the data as quickly as it arrives
- from the sender, or because the receiver must handle some
- higher-priority task, or because the received data must be
- written to disk in order to make room in memory for new data
- to arrive, and so on. After telling the sender to stop, the
- receiver must also be able to tell the sender to start
- transmitting again. This start-and-stop process between two
- communicating computers is call flow control. flow control.
-
- The most common form of software-implemented flow control is
- called the XON/XOFF or DC1/DC3 protocol. When the first
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 23 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 23
-
-
- computer wants the second to stop sending information for a
- while, the first computer sends an Ascii DC3 character
- (called XOFF -- also known as ^S) to the second. When the
- first computer is ready to accept data again, the first
- computer sends an Ascii DC1 character (called XON -- also
- known as ^Q).
-
- All of the ACNS mainframe systems use the XON/XOFF protocol,
- so you leave it active (which it is by default). If you
- need to turn off Xon/Xoff flow control (when you are
- accessing another system, for example), then you can do that
- at
-
- <ALT>P,
- C)ommunications,
- j) Do Xon/Xoff flow control.
-
-
- Another common flow-control mechanism is called Clear-To-
- Send checking. This uses the Clear-To-Send and Request-To-
- Send hardware lines. Clear-To-Send is not needed with the
- ACNS mainframes. However, you may find that some modems --
- especially those with MNP error correction built-in -- need
- to have Clear-To-Send activated when you are accessing non-
- ACNS systems. You can activate Clear-To-Send checking at
-
- <ALT>P,
- C)ommunications,
- h) Check Clear To Send
-
- MNP error correction is discussed in the next section on
- "Setting Up A Modem For Use With PibTerm."
-
-
- Another hardware flow-control method uses the Dataset Ready
- and Data Terminal Ready hardware lines. This protocol is
- rarely used for computer-to-computer connections or
- computer-to-modem connections. Most commonly it is used for
- computer-to-printer or computer-to-other device connections.
-
- You can set DSR/DTR checking at:
-
- <ALT>P,
- C)ommunications,
- i) Check Data Set Ready
-
- DSR/DTR flow control is not required for any of the ACNS
- mainframes. You should not set it when using a modem.
-
-
- Setting Up A Modem For Use With PibTerm Setting Up A Modem For Use With PibTerm
-
- There are three hardware settings on your modem which you
- may need to set to use PibTerm.
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 24 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 24
-
-
-
- The Carrier Detect Line The Carrier Detect Line
-
- A modem tells the PC if a phone line carrier is
- detected, indicating that PibTerm is connected to a
- remote computer, by using the carrier detect line. carrier detect line
- Usually there is a switch inside the modem or on the
- bottom of the modem which indicates whether or not the
- modem should tell the PC if a carrier is detected.
- When this switch is set HIGH, the modem tells the PC
- that the carrier is present even when it is not.
- Setting the switch NORMAL causes the modem to tell the
- PC the truth about the carrier status. For use with
- PibTerm, you should set your modem so that the carrier
- detect line is set NORMAL.
-
- Regrettably, many modems are shipped from the factory
- with the carrier detect line switch set HIGH, so that
- PibTerm will think that a session is in progress even
- when it is not. Consult the documentation for your
- modem to see how to fix that. Some modems allow you
- to override switch settings and set the carrier detect
- line handling with a command. For example, with the
- Hayes 2400 baud modem (but NOT most other 2400 baud and
- 1200 baud modems), you can issue the following command
- to set carrier detect NORMAL:
-
- AT&C1 AT&C1
-
- You may want to add this command to the PibTerm modem
- initialization string at
-
- <ALT>P,
- M)odem and dialing,
- a) Initialization string
-
- so that you don't have to enter it manually every time
- you execute PibTerm.
-
- A second problem is that many serial cables do not
- correctly transmit the carrier detect line to the
- computer. We suggest buying a cable with ALL pins and
- ALL lines provided. The extra expense reduces
- headaches in the long run.
-
- The Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Line The Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Line
-
- Another important signal line between the modem and the
- PC is the Data Terminal Ready or DTR line. This line Data Terminal Ready
- informs the modem that your PC is ready to communicate.
- If you are using a modem, you should most likely set
- DTR NORMAL. Unfortunately, some modems hang up the
- phone when communication parameters like baud rate
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 25 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 25
-
-
- are changed if DTR is set NORMAL. In this case, you
- may want to set the modem DTR to be always HIGH.
-
- Many modems are shipped from the factory with DTR set
- HIGH instead of NORMAL. Consult your modem's reference
- manual to find out how to set DTR to NORMAL. If DTR is
- always HIGH, PibTerm may not be able to hang up the
- phone when you ask it to.
-
- For example, with the Hayes 2400 baud modem (but NOT
- most other 2400 baud and 1200 baud modems), you can
- issue the following command to set data terminal ready
- NORMAL:
-
- AT&D1 AT&D1
-
- You may also want to add this command to the modem
- initialization string.
-
- MNP error correction MNP error correction
-
- Some modems incorporate hardware-implemented error
- checking protocol to filter out line noise and other
- communications problems. If the two modems on both
- ends of a connection provide the same kind of error-
- checking, then this can result in a much "cleaner"
- session. The two modems exchange error-correction data
- as well as the "real" data. If the "real" data appear
- to be incorrectly transmitted, then the two modems will
- negotiate resending the data which did not transmit
- correctly. The modem will not pass on the characters
- to the PC until it appears that they are correctly
- received.
-
- The most common hardware error-correction protocol
- built into modems is the Microcom Networking Protocol Microcom Networking Protocol
- or MNP for short. This protocol was developed by MNP
- Microcom, a major modem manufacturer. MNP has been
- adopted by many other modem manufacturers as well.
-
- If your modem has MNP capabilities, you must disable
- those capabilities in order to achieve a successful
- connection with the ACNS mainframes. This is because
- the mainframe modems do NOT have MNP capabilities, and
- they become quite confused when an MNP modem dials into
- them. The result is non-connection, loss of carrier,
- or just plain garbage displayed on the screen.
-
- Some modems provide a hardware switch to disable MNP.
- On others you can issue a modem command to disable MNP,
- which is more convenient than setting the hardware
- switch since you may still wish to call non-ACNS
- systems that provide MNP on the remote end. The usual
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 26 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 26
-
-
- commands to disable and enable MNP on Hayes-compatible
- modems are:
-
- Enable MNP: AT&M4 Enable AT&M4
- Disable MNP: AT&M0 Disable AT&M0
-
- Just type AT&M0 on the keyboard before dialing an ACNS AT&M0
- system to disable MNP. You can re-enable MNP for use
- with non-ACNS systems by typing AT&M4. AT&M4
-
- In summary, if you are using PibTerm with a modem, then set
- the modem characteristics as follows:
-
- -- Set carrier detect NORMAL. NORMAL
- -- Set data set ready NORMAL. NORMAL.
- -- Set MNP mode OFF for ACNS mainframes. OFF
-
- Remember: "Honest" modems make PibTerm happiest.
-
-
- Hard-Wired Access Hard-Wired Access
-
- If your PC is directly connected to the remote system by a
- hard-wired cable then you may be automatically connected as
- soon as you execute PibTerm and the configuration files are
- read. In other cases you may have to do something to wake
- up the remote system. With the ACNS machines, connection to
- the mainframes occurs through a front-end device called the
- PACX. To gain the attention of the PACX, you must send a
- break to the remote system: in PibTerm, press <ALT>B. Then
- hit the Enter or Return key a couple of times. This should
- get you the familiar "ENTER CLASS" message.
-
- If you are using a hard-wired line, you need to inform
- PibTerm of that so PibTerm won't look for a carrier detect
- line. If you didn't do this when installing PibTerm, or you
- want to change your mind, you can do this at:
-
- <ALT>P
- C)ommunications
- j) Hard-wired connection
-
- Set this parameter value to YES.
-
- To ease the use of PibTerm with a hard-wired line, there is
- a script called HARDWIRE.SCR provided as part of the PibTerm HARDWIRE.SCR
- release materials. This script prompts you for the ACNS
- system you want to access, sets the parameters for that
- system appropriately, and then gets you past the "Enter
- Class" message.
-
-
- DIU/AILU access DIU/AILU access
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 27 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 27
-
-
- Regrettably, DIUs and AILUs do NOT incorporate the Hayes AT
- command set. To use a DIU with the ACNS systems, you need
- to manually dial the phone number of the system to which you
- wish to connect. (AILUs work the same way.) Then you can
- invoke a dialing script manually using <ALT>G.
-
-
- Setting Up And Using The Dialing Directory Setting Up And Using The Dialing Directory
-
- If you want to dial into a remote system, you can access the
- Dialing menu with <ALT>D. Then you can either use the
- directory for automatic dialing or press M and enter M
- the number manually. Proceed with the normal login
- procedure for the remote system when the connection takes.
-
- The release materials for PibTerm v4.1 contain a customized
- dialing directory with relevant ACNS computer numbers
- already defined for you. You may want to add more numbers
- to your dialing directory, or change the communications
- parameters for the numbers provided.
-
-
- Dialing directory file PIBTERM.FON Dialing directory file PIBTERM.FON
-
- The dialing directory resides in the file PIBTERM.FON. This PIBTERM.FON
- file, like all the other PibTerm configuration files, is an
- ordinary Ascii text file. The format of the dialing
- directory is documented in the PibTerm Parameters Reference PibTerm Parameters Reference
- Manual. Manual.
-
- When PibTerm starts execution, the contents of the dialing
- directory PIBTERM.FON is read into memory. When you finish
- PibTerm, an updated directory is written back to
- PIBTERM.FON. During the execution of PibTerm, only the
- memory-resident dialing directory entries are referenced.
-
- If you hit <ALT>D with the ACNS-supplied PIBTERM.FON file,
- this is what you will see:
-
-
- ╒[ Dialing Directory ]════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╕
- │No. --------- Name ---------- --- Number --- -Baud- -Bits- -Par- -Stp- │
- │ 1 ACNS Vax 785, 2400 baud 491 3764 2400 7 E 1 │
- │ 2 ACNS Vax 785, 1200 baud 491 5471 2400 7 E 1 │
- │ 3 ACNS Cyber 845, 2400 baud 491 7471 2400 7 E 1 │
- │ 4 ACNS Cyber 845, 1200 baud 491 5055 2400 7 E 1 │
- │ 5 KGSM IBM 4361, 1200 baud 491 8531 1200 7 E 1 │
- │ 6 LUIS, 1200 baud 491 3070 1200 7 E 1 │
- │ 7 IBM bulletin board 491 3892 2400 8 N 1 │
- │ 8 Macintosh bulletin board 491 4962 2400 8 E 1 │
- │ 9 ------------------------- # ### ###-#### 2400 7 E 1 │
- │ 10 ------------------------- # ### ###-#### 2400 7 E 1 │
- │ 11 ------------------------- # ### ###-#### 2400 7 E 1 │
- │ 12 ------------------------- # ### ###-#### 2400 7 E 1 │
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 28 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 28
-
-
- │ 13 ------------------------- # ### ###-#### 2400 7 E 1 │
- │ 14 ------------------------- # ### ###-#### 2400 7 E 1 │
- │ 15 ------------------------- # ### ###-#### 2400 7 E 1 │
- │ │
- │ --> R Revise entry P Revise prefix C Clear entry Q Redial │
- │ PgUp/PgDn Page Esc Exit /// Scroll H Hang up │
- │ M Manual dial Home First page End Last page G Goto page │
- │ Entry to dial ENTER dials highlighted entry L Dial list │
- │ S Search O Order entries │
- ╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 29 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 29
-
-
-
- To dial an entry, simply type the number of the entry and
- hit the Enter or Return key. You can also use the Up and Enter Return Up
- Down arrow keys to highlight a new number, and then hit the Down
- Enter or Return key to dial the highlighted number. If you Enter Return
- want to dial a number not in the directory, hit M to start a M
- manual dial. PibTerm will prompt you for the number to
- dial.
-
- You can page through the dialing directory using the PgUp PgUp
- and PgDn keys, or you can scroll up and down one number at a PgDn
- time by using the up and down arrow keys. Home takes you to Home
- the top of the directory, End takes you to the end of the End
- directory, and ESC takes you out of dialing mode. ESC
-
- L allows PibTerm to try dialing several numbers until it L
- connects to one of the numbers (see the section "Dialing a
- list of numbers"). S allows you to search for a directory S
- entry by name or number. Q redials the last number dialed. Q
-
- W writes the memory-resident dialing entries back to the W
- file PIBTERM.FON. This is useful if you've made a number of
- changes to the dialing directory and you want to be sure the
- changes appear in the PIBTERM.FON file. Normally PibTerm
- writes a revised PIBTERM.FON at the end of PibTerm
- execution, but should PibTerm encounter an error and abort
- then the dialing directory changes will NOT be written.
- It's better to be safe than sorry if you've made lots of
- changes.
-
- The top line of the dialing entry is highlighted. As noted
- above, if you hit the Enter or Return key, PibTerm will dial
- that highlighted entry. When using a mouse, the highlighted
- entry feature is useful because you can scroll through the
- directory entries and dial the highlighted entry without
- having to type the entry number.
-
-
- Sections of the dialing directory Sections of the dialing directory
-
- There are three sections to the dialing directory. Use the
- left and right arrows on the PC's keypad to move among the
- sections. The first section above contains the phone
- numbers and communications line parameters for each number.
- The second section, shown below, indicates whether or not
- local echo should be turned on, whether the backspace key
- should send a backspace or a delete, whether or not line
- feeds should be added to carriage returns, the terminal
- type, and the default transfer type. For ACNS mainframe
- systems these should be set as follows:
-
- Echo: N (No)
- Backspace: BS for Cyber;
- DEL for Vax;
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 30 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 30
-
-
- blank for IBM
- Add line feeds: N (No)
- Terminal type: VT100
- Transfer type: Kermit
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 31 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 31
-
-
-
- ╒[ Dialing Directory ]════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╕
- │No. --------- Name ---------- -Echo- -BS- -Add LF- -Terminal- -Xfer- │
- │ 1 ACNS Vax 785, 2400 baud N DEL N VT100 Kermit │
- │ 2 ACNS Vax 785, 1200 baud N DEL N VT100 Kermit │
- │ 3 ACNS Cyber 845, 2400 baud N BS N VT100 Kermit │
- │ 4 ACNS Cyber 845, 1200 baud N BS N VT100 Kermit │
- │ 5 KGSM IBM 4361, 1200 baud N BS N VT100 Kermit │
- │ 6 LUIS, 1200 baud N BS N VT100 None │
- │ 7 IBM bulletin board N BS N ANSI Kermit │
- │ 8 Macintosh bulletin board N DEL N ANSI Kermit │
- │ 9 ------------------------- N DEL N VT100 Kermit │
- │ 10 ------------------------- N DEL N VT100 Kermit │
- │ 11 ------------------------- N DEL N VT100 Kermit │
- │ 12 ------------------------- N DEL N VT100 Kermit │
- │ 13 ------------------------- N DEL N VT100 Kermit │
- │ 14 ------------------------- N DEL N VT100 Kermit │
- │ 15 ------------------------- N DEL N VT100 Kermit │
- │ │
- │ --> R Revise entry P Revise prefix C Clear entry Q Redial │
- │ PgUp/PgDn Page Esc Exit /// Scroll H Hang up │
- │ M Manual dial Home First page End Last page G Goto page │
- │ Entry to dial ENTER dials highlighted entry L Dial list │
- │ S Search O Order entries W Write directory │
- ╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
-
- The third section contains the name of the script to be
- executed if a successful connection is made, as well as the
- last date and time that phone number was successfully
- connected to. The date and time allow you to keep track of
- the last time you logged in to a system.
-
-
- ╒[ Dialing Directory ]════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╕
- │No. --------- Name ---------- -Script- -Last Date- -Last Time- │
- │ 1 ACNS Vax 785, 2400 baud VAX │
- │ 2 ACNS Vax 785, 1200 baud VAX │
- │ 3 ACNS Cyber 845, 2400 baud CYBER │
- │ 4 ACNS Cyber 845, 1200 baud CYBER │
- │ 5 KGSM IBM 4361, 1200 baud IBM │
-
- .
- .
- .
- │ │
- │ --> R Revise entry P Revise prefix C Clear entry Q Redial │
- │ PgUp/PgDn Page Esc Exit /// Scroll H Hang up │
- │ M Manual dial Home First page End Last page G Goto page │
- │ Entry to dial ENTER dials highlighted entry L Dial list │
- │ S Search O Order entries │
- ╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
-
- Revising a dialing entry Revising a dialing entry
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 32 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 32
-
-
-
- To revise a dialing entry, hit the R key. You will see a
- box appear requesting the number of the dialing entry to be
- modified:
- ╒[ Revise Dialing Entry ]╕
- │Entry to revise ? 9 │ 9
- │ │
- │ │
- ╘════════════════════════╛
-
-
- For example, assume we want to add a new number at dialing
- slot nine. Then enter a 9 as the number to be revised. The 9
- following menu appears:
-
-
- ╒[ Revise Dialing Entry 9 ]══════╕
- │ a) All entries │
- │ b) Name │
- │ c) Number │
- │ d) Baud Rate │
- │ e) Parity │
- │ f) Data Bits │
- │ g) Stop Bits │
- │ h) Local Echo │
- │ i) Backspace │
- │ j) Add Linefeeds │
- │ k) Terminal Type │
- │ l) Transfer Type │
- │ m) Script Name │
- │ q) Quit │
- ╘════════════════════════════════╛
-
-
- Hit a to revise all entries. You will be prompted for each a
- item in turn.
-
- To revise a current entry, follow the same procedure and
- choose only those entries in the above menu which you
- actually want to modify.
-
-
- Dialing prefixes and suffixes Dialing prefixes and suffixes
-
- The numbers in the dialing directory aren't long enough to
- allow for the long distance codes of companies like Sprint
- or MCI. To accommodate such dialing codes, PibTerm allows
- you to define five prefix and postfix strings, which are
- stored in the file PIBTERM.PRE. You define a prefix or
- postfix string with one of the five prefix characters by
- striking P. These characters are: P
-
- '+', '-', '!', '@', '#'.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 33 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 33
-
-
- Suppose you want to access the ACNS machines from out of the
- 312 area code. If you use SPRINT then you need to dial the
- local SPRINT access number, followed by your SPRINT access
- code, followed by the actual number. For clarity let's
- assume that the local SPRINT access number is 888 8888, and
- your Sprint access code is 1234567. You could define the
- prefix string for '+' to be
-
- 8888888,,,1234567
-
- where each comma results in a slight pause to provide SPRINT
- enough time to answer the call and request the access code.
-
- Let's assume that you have used the P command to define that
- prefix for the '+' key. Also, assume that you've added the
- 312 area code to the front of the ACNS Vax 785 dialing entry
- (entry 1).
-
- If you enter +1 to dial, then PibTerm prefixes the number
- for the ACNS Vax 785 from the dialing directory with the
- string associated with '+' and dials:
-
- 888888,,,,1234567 1 312 491 3764
-
-
- Default prefix and suffix Default prefix and suffix
-
- You can also set a default prefix and postfix at the P P
- entry. These will be automatically added to the front and
- back of a highlighted phone number if the number is longer
- than seven digits. For example, say that you define the '+'
- prefix as above, and then make '+' the default prefix. Then
- suppose that you use the up and down arrow keys to highlight
- the phone number for the ACNS Vax 785 to which you have
- already added the initial 312 area code as above. Then if
- you hit Enter or Return, the prefix string associated with
- '+' is automatically added in front of the ACNS Vax phone
- number.
-
- Likewise, you can define a default suffix character, and the
- contents of the associated suffix string will be added to
- the end of a number dialed by selecting its highlighted
- entry. You may also define both a default prefix and suffix
- string at the same time, so that the corresponding strings
- will be added to the front (prefix) and back (suffix) of a
- highlighted number.
-
- The default prefix/suffix facility makes it easier to use
- long-distance services without having to explicitly type the
- prefix and suffix characters -- especially with a mouse.
-
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 34 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 34
-
-
- Redialing the last number dialed -- <ALT>Q Redialing the last number dialed -- <ALT>Q
-
- You can cause PibTerm to redial the last number dialed (if
- any) by hitting Q. If no number has been previously dialed Q.
- in the current session, then you will be placed in the usual
- dialing directory. Using <ALT>Q outside the dialing
- directory is just like using Q inside the dialing directory. Q
-
-
- Dialing a list of numbers Dialing a list of numbers
-
- You can create a list of numbers to be dialed by hitting L L
- in the dialing menu. You may enter up to ten dialing
- directory entries. These will be called in turn until a
- successful connection is made to one of the numbers, or
- until you hit the ESC key. Once PibTerm successfully
- connects to a number in the list, that number is removed
- from the dialing list.
-
- After finishing a session with one of the numbers specified
- in the list, you can hit <ALT>Q to begin dialing the
- remaining numbers in the list in turn. Once again, if a
- successful connection is made, then that number will be
- removed from the list.
-
- Pressing <ALT>D clears any remaining numbers from the
- dialing queue.
-
-
- Using The Short Dialing Prompt Using The Short Dialing Prompt
-
- Normally when you hit <ALT>D you get the long dialing menu
- described above. If you have a good memory, you can avoid
- getting this display by requesting the short dialing prompt
- as follows:
-
- <ALT>P,
- M)odem and dialing,
- p) Use short dialing menu
-
- If you set this feature to YES, then hitting <ALT>D issues a
- simple one-line prompt:
-
- Dialing Command -->
-
- You can then enter the dialing entry number you wish to
- dial, or you can hit the Enter key to bring up the full
- dialing directory menu display, or you can hit another
- dialing command letter like S for search or L to start a S L
- list dial.
-
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 35 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 35
-
-
- Dialing A System By Name Dialing A System By Name
-
- PibTerm does not directly support dialing a system by name
- instead of entry number, but there are at least two
- different ways to dial by name indirectly.
-
- The first is to use the Search facility of the dialing menu.
- First enter the dialing menu by hitting <ALT>D. Then hit
- S. You will be prompted for a search string. PibTerm scans S
- the name and phone number fields of the dialing directory
- for a match to the search string you specified. The search
- is not sensitive to case, and proceeds from the current
- highlighted position to the end of the dialing directory,
- and then wraps around starting at the first dialing entry.
- If a matching entry is found, then PibTerm highlights that
- entry, and you can dial it by simply hitting the Enter key.
-
- For example, suppose you wish to dial the Cyber at 2400
- baud. You could hit S to initiate a search and enter Cyber S Cyber
- as a search string. The third entry (which is the first
- entry with the word Cyber in the name field) would be
- highlighted. Just hitting Enter would then cause PibTerm to
- dial the Cyber.
-
- If the first entry located by the search isn't the one you
- want, then hit S again and do the search over starting at S
- the new location in the dialing directory..
-
- A second method for dialing a system by name is to define
- your own special dialing command using a script. Such a
- script is presented as an example in the section "Another
- Sample Script -- Dialing By Name."
-
-
- Backing up PIBTERM.FON Backing up PIBTERM.FON
-
- PibTerm rewrites the ENTIRE dialing directory at the end of
- execution whenever any changes have been made to the
- directory. These changes include explicit modifications to
- dialing entries, as well as implicit modifications like
- updating the date/time of last access to any successfully
- dialed systems.
-
- You should make a backup copy of PIBTERM.FON every couple of
- days to avoid problems in case PibTerm cannot write the
- updated directory -- for example, because of lack of disk
- space. You can use the DOS COPY command to do this:
-
- COPY PIBTERM.FON BACKUP.FON
-
- where BACKUP.FON becomes a backup copy of the phone
- directory.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 36 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 36
-
-
- Should PIBTERM.FON be damaged, you can copy the backup file
- as follows:
-
- COPY BACKUP.FON PIBTERM.FON
-
-
- Automatic Dialing Speed Adjustment Automatic Dialing Speed Adjustment
-
- Most Hayes-compatible modems set the speed of the connection
- to match that of the system called when dialing. PibTerm
- automatically adjusts the speed the PC expects in order to
- match what the modem reports.
-
- However, there are times when you may not want PibTerm to
- perform this automatic speed adjustment. For example, you
- may have a modem which allows a constant high speed like
- 9600 baud between the modem and the PC, while the modem
- itself handles any "slowdown" required for accessing the
- remote system on its own.
-
- In this case, you should make sure to always specify the
- highest possible speed (say, 9600) in your dialing
- directory, and then turn OFF the automatic speed adjustment
- by setting the parameter at
-
- <ALT>P,
- M)odem and dialing,
- n) Match speed of called system
-
- to NO.
-
- In many cases, you also need to set CTS checking to YES at
-
- <ALT>P,
- C)ommunications,
- h) Check clear to send
-
- when using a constant high speed between the PC and the
- modem. Check the manufacturer's instructions for your
- modems for details.
-
-
- Modem Pools Modem Pools
-
- Sometimes it is convenient to attach a number of modems with
- the ability to place outgoing calls, as well as to receive
- incoming calls, to a computer system. Such a modem pool modem pool
- allows you to dial the remote computer and then use the
- modem pool modems to place calls through that remote system.
- When you use a modem pool, you have to consider that modem
- responses to modem commands may be issued either by the
- local modem attached to your PC OR the remote modem pool
- modem.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 37 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 37
-
-
- Among the most commonly used modem pools are those provided
- by the commercial Telenet and PC Pursuit services.
-
- Using a modem pool can be a bit confusing. When you
- initially dial the remote system which provides the modem
- pool, you get the usual "CONNECT" message from the modem CONNECT
- attached to your PC. When you dial another system THROUGH
- the remote modem pool modem, you may also see a "CONNECT" CONNECT
- message issued by the modem pool modem. Likewise other modem
- status messages like BUSY or NO CARRIER may be issued either BUSY NO CARRIER
- by your local modem or by the remote modem.
-
- PibTerm has no way of distinguishing between modem status
- messages issued by your local modem and the remote modem.
- Normally, when you use the dialing facilties at <ALT>D,
- PibTerm hangs up the phone line when a status message like
- BUSY or NO CARRIER is received. (BUSY indicates that the BUSY NO CARRIER BUSY
- phone line is busy, and NO CARRIER indicates that the phone NO CARRIER
- line carrier has dropped.) This ensures that the phone line
- is ready for the next dialing attempt. However, if the
- remote modem pool modem issues the message, then you do NOT
- want PibTerm to hang up the phone, since then you would need
- to dial the modem pool again.
-
- To prevent PibTerm from hanging up the phone when a message
- like BUSY or NO CARRIER is received during an <ALT>D dialing
- sequence, set the parameter at
-
- <ALT>P,
- M)odem and dialing,
- s) Hold line after abortive dial
-
- to YES. You should set this ONLY when accessing a modem
- pool, and then reset it back to NO when you are finished
- with the modem pool.
-
- Another problem is that the remote modem pool modem cannot
- return a carrier detect signal back to your PC. The carrier
- detect status is based only upon the connection between your
- local modem and the remote system to which the modem pool
- modem is attached, NOT the connection between the modem pool
- modem and whatever system you dialed through the modem pool
- modem.
-
- To get around this problem set the parameter at
-
- <ALT>P,
- M)odem and dialing,
- m) Carrier line always high
-
- to YES. Again, you should set this ONLY when accessing the
- modem pool (or if your modem requires this setting anyway).
-
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 38 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 38
-
-
- Dialing Problems Dialing Problems
-
- There are a number of problems which can occur when you try
- to dial a number. Assuming that your hardware setup is
- correct, the most common dialing problems arise from
- incorrect settings of the modem parameters. The modem
- parameters can be found at
-
- <ALT>P,
- M)odem and dialing.
-
- Problem: The modem starts to dial, but immediately Problem
- after the number is dialed the dialing
- directory display reappears, and the dialing
- stops.
-
- Solution: The modem timeout is set too small. Go to Solution
-
- <ALT>P,
- M)odem and dialing,
- i) Dialing Timeout.
-
- You'll probably see that the value is zero.
- Set it to something reasonable, like 30
- seconds. This is the amount of time PibTerm
- waits for the remote system to answer the
- phone before PibTerm cancels the call.
-
- Problem: The modem appears to dial -- the dialing box Problem
- appears -- but nothing actually happens. It
- looks as if the modem never placed the call.
-
- Solution: Make sure that you have chosen the correct Solution
- serial port for your modem. You can change
- the serial port at
-
- <ALT>P,
- C)ommunications,
- a) Serial port.
-
- If you have the correct serial port, check if
- you have a touch-tone or rotary-dial phone
- system. PibTerm is configured by default for
- a touch-tone phone line. If you have a
- rotary-dial phone line, then you will have to
- change the dialing command at:
-
- <ALT>P,
- M)odem and dialing,
- b) Dialing command prefix
-
- from ATDT (for touch-tone lines) to ATDP (for ATDT ATDP
- rotary-dial phone lines).
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 39 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 39
-
-
- Problem: PibTerm dials successfully, but then Problem
- immediately reports that a connection is
- made, even before the phone is answered by
- the remote computer.
-
- Solution: The problem is that your modem is set for Solution
- carrier detect always HIGH instead of carrier
- detect NORMAL. If possible, change your
- modem settings so that the carrier detect
- line is NORMAL. If you can't do that, set
- PibTerm to ignore the carrier line and wait
- for the modem to tell it that a connection
- has been established using a modem response
- string ("CONNECT" in the case of Hayes-
- compatible modems). You do this at:
-
- <ALT>P,
- M)odem and dialing,
- m) Carrier line always high
-
- Set this to YES if your modem keeps the
- carrier line always HIGH.
-
- This carrier-detect-always-high problem also
- arises if you use an outbound modem pool
- through a hard-wired connection. That is,
- your PC is hard-wired to a device like the
- PACX and one of the possible class selections
- is a modem pool (see the section on "Modem
- Pools" above).
-
- The modem pool modem will not be able to
- correctly signal carrier detect to you, and
- so you set BOTH the hard-wired line option at
-
- <ALT>P,
- C)ommunications,
- j) Hard-wired connection
-
- AND the carrier line always high option to
- YES.
-
- Problem: Dialing commands aren't correctly interpreted Problem
- (perhaps digits are dropped), or the modem
- initialization string appears to be ignored,
- etc.
-
- Solution: This usually indicates that your modem cannot Solution
- accept commands at the full speed of the
- connection, and/or that your modem may
- require extra delays between reception of
- individual modem commands.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 40 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 40
-
-
- To slow down the speed at which PibTerm sends
- modem commands (including dialing commands)
- to the modem, set the parameter at
-
- <ALT>P,
- M)odem and dialing,
- l) intercharacter delay
-
- to a non-zero value. Usually a value of 50
- (which means introduce a delay of 50
- milliseconds between sending each character)
- works well.
-
- You can also introduce extra one-second
- delays into the modem command strings. For
- example, many modems require an extra one or
- two seconds of delay after receiving an ATZ ATZ
- (reset modem) command before another AT
- command will be processed. You can use the
- '~' to add as many one-second delays into a
- modem command string as necessary. For
- example, you might need to alter the modem
- initialization string at
-
- <ALT>P,
- M)odem and dialing,
- a) Initialization string
-
- from the default
-
- ATZ|~ATX1|
-
- to something like
-
- ATZ|~~~ATX1|
-
- for a modem which requires more than one
- second to execute the ATZ. ATZ
-
- Problem: Junk characters appear after connecting to Problem
- the remote system. Some of the characters
- are correct, others are incorrect.
-
- Solution: This is almost always the result of an Solution
- incorrect parity setting. Check that the
- dialing directory entry has the correct data
- bits, stop bits, and parity setting for the
- remote system being dialed. Also check that
- any attached script does not incorrectly
- reset the parity. Remember that the entries
- in the dialing directory -- NOT the settings
- before you dial -- are used when connecting
- to the remote system.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 41 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 41
-
-
- Some resident programs interfere with proper
- operation of the parity and data bit settings
- in PibTerm. For example, some of the OPUS
- BBS communications drivers cause interference
- with other communications programs in
- peculiar ways. Sometimes you can get around
- these problems by using unusual
- databits/parity/stop bit settings.
-
-
- VT100 Terminal Emulation VT100 Terminal Emulation
-
- PibTerm defaults to VT100 terminal emulation mode. VT100
- emulation is the one to use when accessing the ACNS Vax or
- Cyber, or the Kellogg/Econ IBM.
-
- To use each of these machines, a few parameter changes are
- necessary to accomodate differences in the way each system
- interprets the VT100 keyboard. These differences concern
- the backspace key and the VT100 keypad definitions.
-
- The change in the backspace key can be handled by setting
- the dialing directory correctly when you are using a modem
- to access the ACNS machines. The change in the keypad
- definitions can be handled by an associated script which
- sets the keypad key definitions correctly after a successful
- dial-in is completed. The sample directory provided with
- the PibTerm release materials sets the backspace correctly
- for the various ACNS systems. Also, each dialing entry
- refers to a script which sets the keypad keys correctly for
- each of the mainframes. The script names are:
-
- VAX.SCR for the VAX 785 VAX.SCR
- CYBER.SCR for the Cyber 845 under NOS or NOS/VE CYBER.SCR
- IBMCMS.SCR for the Econ/KGSM IBM 4361 system IBMCMS.SCR
- LUIS.SCR for the Library information system LUIS.SCR
-
- If you are making a hard-wired connection, then another
- script called HARDWIRE.SCR will set the parameters correctly HARDWIRE.SCR
- for each system.
-
- Let's look at the backspace and keypad definitions in more
- detail so that you will understand what the scripts do for
- you.
-
-
- The Backspace key The Backspace key
-
- For the Vax, you should set the backspace key to send the
- Ascii DEL (delete character). This is Ascii code 127. For
- the Cyber, you should set the backspace key to send an ASCII
- BS (backspace character). This is Ascii code 8. For the IBM
- systems (either KGSM/Econ or LUIS), you should set the
- backspace to send the escape sequence <ESC>[OA, which should
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 42 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 42
-
-
- also be the same sequence sent by the left-arrow on the
- keypad (as defined in IBMCMS.FNC, see below). IBMCMS.FNC
-
- You can change the behavior of the backspace key at
-
- <ALT>P,
- I)nput
-
-
- For the Cyber, choose option
-
- c) Backspace key sends BS, <CTRL>BS sends DEL
-
- For the Vax, choose option
-
- d) Backspace key sends DEL, <CTRL>BS sends BS
-
- For LUIS and the KGSM/Econ IBM 4361, explicitly enter the
- escape sequence <ESC>[OA by choosing
-
- a) Backspace key sends
-
- and then entering the backspace string as ^[[OA, using the ^[[OA
- special two-character ^ + [ combination to represent the ESC ESC
- character (Ascii 27). (See the section on "Keyboard
- Editing" for more details.)
-
- The correct backspace values for the Cyber and Vax will be
- set for you by the dialing directory if you dial in using a
- modem. You will need to set the backspace explicitly for
- the CMS machines, or add a command to a dialing script to
- set the backspace. The HARDWIRE.SCR script sets the HARDWIRE.SCR
- backspace correctly for all the systems.
-
-
- VT100 keypad definitions VT100 keypad definitions
-
- There are several different IBM keyboards for PCs. Earlier
- models and many PC clones used an 83 or 84 key keyboard,
- with two rows of five function keys arranged vertically
- along the left-hand side of the keyboard. The latest IBM
- PCs and clones exhibit a quite different keyboard layout,
- somewhat euphemistically referred to as the "enhanced"
- keyboard. This keyboard displays twelve function keys F1
- through F12 along the top row of the keyboard, and also
- features a separate cursor pad and direction keypad.
- PibTerm allows you to use the extra cursor, keypad, and
- function keys of the enhanced keyboard both as defined keys
- and for routine use in doing things like scrolling through
- the dialing directory.
-
- None of these IBM PC keyboards provides for a direct
- mapping of the VT100 keypad, so PibTerm allows you to
- define a variety of PC keys to act like VT100 keys. It is
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 43 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 43
-
-
- convenient to use different definitions (or mappings) of the
- VT100 keys onto the PC keys, depending upon which remote
- system you are accessing and which PC keyboard you have.
- Sample mappings for each of the ACNS systems are provided as
- part of the PibTerm release materials.
-
- To select one of these definitions, access the Function
- Key Definition menu:
-
- <ALT>K),
- R)ead definitions from file
-
- to read the definitions from a file and enter the
- appropriate file name:
-
- For the Vax: DECVAX.FNC (84 key keyboards) DECVAX.FNC
- DECVAXE.FNC (101 key keyboards) DECVAXE.FNC
-
- For the Cyber: CDCNOS.FNC CDCNOS.FNC
-
- For the IBM: IBMCMS.FNC (84 key keyboards) IBMCMS.FNC
- IBMCMSE.FNC (101 key keyboards) IBMCMSE.FNC
-
- Regardless of which type of keyboard your PC has, you may
- want to redefine the keypad definitions yourself. A
- description of how to do that appears later in the section
- on "Defining Function Keys."
-
- If you are using the supplied dialing directory, then the
- scripts attached to the dialing entries for the machines can
- supply the correct function key definitions automatically.
- If you are using a hard-wired connection, then the
- HARDWIRE.SCR script will supply the proper function key HARDWIRE.SCR
- definitions.
-
-
- To use PibTerm with VAX/VMS: To use PibTerm with VAX/VMS:
-
- Enter the VMS command
-
- SET TERMINAL/VT100 SET TERMINAL/VT100
-
- which tells VMS that you're using a VT100 terminal. If you
- know that you will always be logging in to the Vax using
- PibTerm or another VT100-compatible terminal or emulation
- program, you should place the "SET" statement in your
- login.com file on the Vax. That way it will be executed login.com
- automatically each time you log in.
-
- The keyboard file DECVAX.FNC defines F1 through F10 to be DECVAX.FNC
- the left half of the VT100 keypad, and Shift F1 through
- Shift F10 to be the right half of the VT100 keypad. That
- is, the mapping looks like this:
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 44 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 44
-
-
-
- Standard VT100 Keypad
-
- ┌--------┬--------┬--------┬--------┐
- │ │ │ │ │
- │ PF 1 │ PF 2 │ PF 3 │ PF 4 │
- │ │ │ │ │
- ├--------┼--------┼--------┼--------┤
- │ │ │ │ │
- │ 7 │ 8 │ 9 │ - │
- │ │ │ │ │
- ├--------┼--------┼--------┼--------┤
- │ │ │ │ │
- │ 4 │ 5 │ 6 │ , │
- │ │ │ │ │
- ├--------┼--------┼--------┼--------┤
- │ │ │ │ │
- │ 1 │ 2 │ 3 │ E │
- │ │ │ │ N │
- ├--------┴--------┼--------┤ T │
- │ │ │ E │
- │ 0 │ . │ R │
- │ │ │ │
- └-----------------┴--------┴--------┘
-
-
- IBM PC Function Keys from DECVAX.FNC
-
- ┌--------┬--------┐ ┌--------┬--------┐
- │ │ │ │ Shift │ Shift │
- │ F1 │ F2 │ │ F1 │ F2 │
- │ │ │ │ │ │
- ├--------┼--------┤ ├--------┼--------┤
- │ │ │ │ Shift │ Shift │
- │ F3 │ F4 │ │ F3 │ F4 │
- │ │ │ │ │ │
- ├--------┼--------┤ ├--------┼--------┤
- │ │ │ │ Shift │ Shift │
- │ F5 │ F6 │ │ F5 │ F6 │
- │ │ │ │ │ │
- ├--------┼--------┤ ├--------┼--------┤
- │ │ │ │ Shift │ Shift │
- │ F7 │ F8 │ │ F7 │ F8 │
- │ │ │ │ │ │
- ├--------┼--------┤ ├--------┼--------┤
- │ │ │ │ Shift │ Shift │
- │ F9 │ F10 │ │ F9 │ F10 │
- │ │ │ │ │ │
- └--------┴--------┘ └--------┴--------┘
-
-
- To get the shifted version of a function key, hold down the
- shift key while striking the function key.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 45 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 45
-
-
- The VT100 arrow keys are mapped onto the arrow keys of the
- right-hand PC Keypad.
-
- The definitions in DECVAXE.FNC, for use with the enhanced DECVAXE.FNC
- keyboard, provide a different mapping scheme, since it is
- possible to match the VT100 keypad more closely with the
- extended PC keyboard.
-
-
- The cursor keys in DECVAXE.FNC are mapped to the separate DECVAXE.FNC
- cursor keypad. The PF keys are mapped as follows:
-
- PF1 = main keypad /
- PF2 = extra keypad Page Up
- PF3 = extra keypad Page Dn
- PF4 = main keypad *
-
- The reason for defining the PF keys "out of order" is
- because access to PF1 + other main keypad keys is easier
- that way. PF1 is the "gold" key for editors like EDT, and
- it is a less awkward stretch to put it on the main PC
- keypad.
-
- The rest of the main PC keypad acts just like VT100 keypad,
- except that the '+' on the PC keypad acts like the ',' on
- the VT100 keypad.
-
- Symbolically, here are the correspondences, with the PC
- keyboard key name on top and the VT100 keyboard key name on
- the bottom.
-
- +---------+--------+--------+
- | | | |
- | Insert | Home | Page Up|
- | | | (PF2) |
- +---------+--------+--------+
- | | | |
- | Delete | End | Page Dn|
- | | | (PF3) |
- +---------+--------+--------+
-
- +--------+
- | |
- | Up |
- | (Up) |
- +---------+--------+--------+
- | | | |
- | Left | Down | Right |
- | (Left) | (Down) | (Right)|
- +---------+--------+--------+
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 46 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 46
-
-
- +---------+--------+--------+--------+
- | | | | |
- | Num Lock| / | * | - |
- | | (PF1) | (PF4) | (-) |
- +---------+--------+--------+--------+
- | | | | |
- | 7 | 8 | 9 | |
- | (7) | (8) | (9) | + |
- +---------+--------+--------+ |
- | | | | |
- | 4 | 5 | 6 | (,) |
- | (4) | (5) | (6) | |
- +---------+--------+--------+--------+
- | | | | |
- | 1 | 2 | 3 | |
- | (1) | (2) | (3) | Enter |
- +---------+--------+--------+ |
- | | | |
- | 0 | . |(Enter) |
- | (0) | (.) | |
- +---------+--------+--------+--------+
-
-
- To use PibTerm with IBM CMS: To use PibTerm with IBM CMS:
-
- Enter VT100 as the terminal name when prompted to do so by VT100
- the IBM system. If you use the supplied script IBM.SCR, IBM.SCR
- then this will be done for you automatically.
-
- The function keys for CMS are mapped quite differently than
- for the Vax. Rather than attempt to emulate the keypad
- layout of the VT100, the function key definitions in
- IBMCMS.FNC attempt to match the key assignments of the IBM IBMCMS.FNC
- 3270 family terminals. Here is the mapping:
-
- PC keys 3270 keys PC keys 3270 keys
-
- F1 -> F10 PFK1 -> PFK10
- <Shift>F1 -> <SHIFT>F10 PFK11 -> PFK20
- <CTRL>F1 -> <CTRL>F10 PFK21 -> PFK31
- <ALT>F1 -> <ALT>F5 PFK32 -> PFK36
- <ALT>F8 PA1
- <ALT>F9 PA2
- <ALT>F10 PA3
-
-
- IBMCMSE.FNC uses a similar mapping: IBMCMSE.FNC
-
- PC keys 3270 keys PC keys 3270 keys
-
- F1 -> F12 PFK1 -> PFK12
- <Shift>F1 -> <SHIFT>F12 PFK13 -> PFK24
- <CTRL>F1 -> <CTRL>F12 PFK25 -> PFK36
- <ALT>F1 PA1
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 47 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 47
-
-
- <ALT>F2,Keypad Enter PA2
- <ALT>F3 PA3
-
-
- To use PibTerm with NOS: To use PibTerm with NOS:
-
- After logging in to NOS, enter the command:
-
- SCREEN,VT100. SCREEN,VT100.
-
- CDCNOS.FNC contains another mapping of the VT100 keys for CDCNOS.FNC
- use with Control Data's NOS and NOS/VE operating systems.
- The key mapping is as follows: use F1 through F8 for the F1 F8
- lower row of "tombstones" displayed by NOS, and use Shift F1 Shift F1
- through Shift F8 for the upper row of tombstones. Use the Shift F8
- arrow keys on the PC's numeric keypad.
-
- Suppose you invoke the FSE editor for an existing file
- called BOGUSCO:
-
- FSE,BOGUSCO. FSE,BOGUSCO.
-
- Then you should see a screen something like the following:
-
-
- -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- NOS FULL SCREEN EDITOR
- Upper Case File BOGUSCO Lines 1 - 19 Size 21
- LINE 1 OF BOGUSCO
- LINE 2 OF BOGUSCO
- LINE 3 OF BOGUSCO
- LINE 4 OF BOGUSCO
- LINE 5 OF BOGUSCO
- LINE 6 OF BOGUSCO
- LINE 7 OF BOGUSCO
- LINE 8 OF BOGUSCO
- LINE 9 OF BOGUSCO
- LINE 10 OF BOGUSCO
- LINE 11 OF BOGUSCO
- LINE 12 OF BOGUSCO
- LINE 13 OF BOGUSCO
- LINE 14 OF BOGUSCO
- LINE 15 OF BOGUSCO
- LINE 16 OF BOGUSCO
- LINE 17 OF BOGUSCO
- LINE 18 OF BOGUSCO
- LINE 19 OF BOGUSCO
- BKW LINEDN DELC DELL UNDO COPY HOME CLEAR BKW LINEDN DELC DELL UNDO COPY HOME CLEAR
- F1 FWD F2 LINEUP F3 INSC F4 INSL F5 MARK F6 MOVE F7 HELP F8 QUIT FWD LINEUP INSC INSL MARK MOVE HELP QUIT
- -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- You can move forward in the file by hitting the F1 key on
- the PC. To move backward, hit the Shift and F1 keys Shift F1
- together. You do NOT have to hit the Enter key; PibTerm Enter
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 48 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 48
-
-
- automatically adds the carriage return. This makes editing
- on NOS a bit more convenient than on a real VT100 terminal.
-
- The keypad definitions in CDCNOS.FNC are still useful on the CDCNOS.FNC
- enhanced keyboard.
-
-
- Automatic Loading of Function Key Definitions Automatic Loading of Function Key Definitions
-
- You may request PibTerm to search the function key directory
- for a .FNC file which corresponds to the currently selected
- terminal emulation. (See the section "Setting a function
- key subdirectory" which descibes how to set a function key
- directory.) To do this, set the parameter at:
-
- <ALT>P,
- T)erminal emulation,
- j) Autoload function keys
-
- If the .FNC file is found, the function key definitions
- therein are loaded when the selected emulation is started,
- just as if <ALT>K were used to read in the file. (See the <ALT>K
- section "Defining function keys -- <ALT>K".)
-
- Currently, the following file names are used:
-
- Emulation .FNC file name Emulation .FNC file name
-
- VT100 VT100.FNC
- Ansi/BBS ANSI.FNC
- VT52 VT52.FNC
- Tek 4010 TEK4010.FNC
- Dumb DUMB.FNC
-
- and so on.
-
- This option is most useful if you plan to use the same set
- of function key definitions for a specific terminal
- emulation type on several different systems.
-
-
- Switching Between VT100 Keypad Modes Switching Between VT100 Keypad Modes
-
- The VT100 terminal provides for switching between numeric
- keypad mode and applications keypad mode under program
- control. On the PC this distinction is essentially
- irrelevant because you can always use <SHIFT>keypad-key to <SHIFT>keypad-key
- get a numeric digit on the right-hand numeric keypad.
-
- However, you may still want to load different key
- definitions depending upon whether the VT100 keypad is in
- numeric mode or in applications mode. The principal reason
- is that the cursor key definitions -- that is, the escape
- sequences which are to be sent to the remote system when
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 49 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 49
-
-
- an arrow key is struck -- are different in numeric mode and
- applications mode. Here is a table of the differences:
-
- Key Numeric mode Applications mode Key Numeric mode Applications mode
-
- Up arrow ESC [A ESC [O A
- Down arrow ESC [B ESC [O B
- Right arrow ESC [C ESC [O C
- Left arrow ESC [D ESC [O D
-
- You can request that PibTerm should load new function key
- files when it receives the VT100 set or reset applications
- keypad mode escape sequences by setting the parameter at
-
- <ALT>P,
- T)erminal emulation,
- b) VT100 settings,
- g) do VT100 applic/numeric keypad switch
-
- to YES.
-
- You can specify the names of the .FNC files to be loaded
- when PibTerm receives either the VT100 set or reset
- applications keypad mode escape sequences at
-
- <ALT>P,
- T)erminal emulation,
- b) VT100 settings,
- h) Key file for VT100 applic mode
- i) Key file for VT100 numeric mode
-
- When accessing the ACNS mainframe systems, you should leave
- the "do VT100 applic/numeric keypad switch" parameter set to
- NO, and also leave the key file names blank.
-
-
- The PibTerm Status Line The PibTerm Status Line
-
- The bottom line of the display in VT100 mode is a special
- status line which indicates the current values of important
- communications variables.
-
- The contents of the status line look like this:
-
- Scriptname HH:MM -CA -PR -LO -LF -LE -XO -CT -CD COMn baudpdb message
-
- The items are:
-
- Scriptname --- indicates the name of a currently executing script,
- if any, or the name of the terminal emulation in use.
- HH:MM --- is the time of day.
- CA --- Capture file status: -CA means no capture file open,
- +CA means capture file open.
- PR --- Printer file status: -PR means no printer file open,
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 50 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 50
-
-
- +PR means printer file open.
- LO --- Logging file status: -LO means no logging file open,
- +LO means logging file open.
- LF --- Line feed status: -LF means no line feeds added to
- incoming carriage returns,
- +LF means line feeds added.
- LE --- Local echo status : -LE means remote echo,
- +LE means local echo.
- XO --- XON/XOFF status: -XO means no XON/XOFF flow control,
- +XO means XON/XOFF flow control turned on.
- CT --- Clear-to-send status: -CT means no CTS checking,
- +CT means CTS checking turned on.
- CD --- Carrier detect status: +CD means carrier line high,
- -CD means carrier dropped.
- COMn --- indicates which serial port is currently in use.
- baud,p,d,b --- baud rate, parity, data bits, and stop bits.
- message --- messages are displayed to indicate unusual
- problems in communication.
-
- For example, consider the following status line:
-
- VT100 14:43 -CA -PR -LO -LF -LE +XO -CT -CD COM1 9600E71
-
- This indicates:
-
- -- VT100 emulation is in effect.
- -- The time is 14:43 or 2:43 pm.
- -- Capture file logging is off.
- -- Printer logging is off.
- -- Log file logging is off.
- -- Line feeds are not added to carriage returns.
- -- Local echo is off.
- -- XON/XOFF flow control is in effect.
- -- CTS flow control is off.
- -- No carrier detected.
- -- Port 1 (COM1:) is used for communications.
- -- The speed of the connection is 9600 baud; even
- parity; seven-bit data bytes; one stop bit.
-
- Sometimes you may want to turn off the display of the status
- line. You might do this if you are accessing a remote
- system which needs to write to the bottom line of the screen
- where the status line normally resides. Or, you may find
- the status line unesthetic. To turn OFF the display of the
- status line, change the value at:
-
- <ALT>P,
- T)erminal,
- e) Display status line
-
- to be NO.
-
- If you disable the display of the status line, then you WILL
- NOT SEE any error messages that PibTerm normally shows in
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 51 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 51
-
-
- case of problems. Therefore, you should enable the status
- line display whenever possible.
-
- The status line is NOT displayed in Tek4010 emulation mode.
-
-
- The Scroll Lock Key The Scroll Lock Key
-
- In all terminal modes except gossip mode you can IMMEDIATELY
- halt the screen display from advancing by depressing the
- Scroll Lock key. The screen freezes until you hit the Scroll Lock
- Scroll Lock key again. The status line indicates that the
- Scroll Lock key has been depressed by displaying the message
- Scroll Lock ON. Scroll Lock ON.
-
-
- Resetting the Terminal -- <SHIFT>TAB Resetting the Terminal -- <SHIFT>TAB
-
- Sometimes the terminal display may go haywire because line
- noise causes PibTerm to switch to the VT100 graphics
- character set incorrectly. You can reset the terminal
- emulation by hitting the <SHIFT>TAB keys together. This
- clears the screen and resets all terminal attributes.
-
-
- Clearing the Screen -- <ALT>C Clearing the Screen -- <ALT>C
-
- To clear the screen display without resetting the terminal
- emulation, hit <ALT>C.
-
-
- What Doesn't Work in VT100 emulation What Doesn't Work in VT100 emulation
-
- The VT100 emulation in PibTerm is good enough for nearly all
- the software commonly used on any of the ACNS machines. The
- principal VT100 features lacking in PibTerm are:
-
- -- 132 column mode
- -- Double high, double wide characters
-
- If you have an ATI EGA Wonder or ATI VIP VGA graphics card
- installed in your PC, then PibTerm can display 132 columns
- correctly. (Both are products of ATI Technologies Inc.)
- You should tell PibTerm that you have an ATI EGA Wonder or
- ATI VIP:
-
- <ALT>P,
- V)ideo mode,
- r) ATI EGA Wonder/ ATI VIP VGA installed.
-
- Incoming characters from the remote system may be dropped
- when switching between 132 column mode and 80 column mode
- with the ATI cards unless the remote system supports
- XON/XOFF protocol, so don't be surprised when that happens.
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 52 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 52
-
-
- This should not occur with the ACNS systems, all of which
- support XON/XOFF.
-
- Most multitaskers cannot support the 132 column mode, so
- make sure that this "ATI installed" option is set to NO when
- you are running under a multitasker unless you are sure that
- the 132 column mode is supported.
-
- PibTerm simulates double-width characters by displaying
- normal-sized characters with an extra space in between.
- Some of the line-drawing characters are doubled, so that a
- continuous horizontal line will not be broken up. Double-
- high characters (which are also double-width) are simulated
- by repeating the same characters on two adjacent lines.
-
-
- Other Text Terminal Emulation Modes Other Text Terminal Emulation Modes
-
- PibTerm provides several other text terminal emulation modes
- besides VT100. The ADM3A, ADM5, and VT52 emulations are
- most useful for some older systems which don't support
- VT100, or when you are running at a slow baud rate so that
- the simpler escape sequences used by those terminals (for
- facilities like cursor positioning) increase throughput.
- The TV925 emulation is not complete and was designed for a
- very specific need. It will not work well on other systems
- (like Unix) that require a more complete TV925 emulation.
-
- ANSI/BBS emulation is a subset of VT100 with some extensions
- for color and music playing. This is the mode supported by
- most remote bulletin board systems, and you should use it
- rather than VT100 when dialing into such a system. For
- example, you should select ANSI/BBS when dialing into the
- ACNS IBM PC bulletin board system.
-
- Dumb terminal mode acts like a very stupid "glass TTY." No
- escape sequences are interpreted. Dumb terminal emulation
- is useful with remote systems that do not provide any full-
- screen facilities and which do not work properly when VT100
- emulation is set in PibTerm.
-
- There is another use for dumb terminal mode. Normally all
- the emulation modes -- including dumb terminal mode --
- display characters received from the remote system on the
- PC's screen using either direct screen writes or system BIOS
- calls. These methods bypass the standard MS DOS facilities
- and both are much faster and more flexible than invoking MS
- DOS.
-
- However, dumb terminal mode can optionally perform screen
- output using the MS DOS facilities. This causes the screen
- output to be handled by any resident screen driver (like
- ANSI.SYS). This option is especially useful because there ANSI.SYS
- are a number of commercially-available programs which can be
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 53 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 53
-
-
- installed as MS DOS device drivers and which will provide
- emulation of graphics terminals like the Tek4014 or Tek4105.
- All you need to do to use these drivers with PibTerm is to
- set PibTerm to use MS DOS style output, as follows:
-
- <ALT>P,
- T)erminal emulation,
- a) Terminal to emulate,
- a) Dumb
- m) Use DOS console output
-
- If "Use DOS console output" is set to YES, any resident
- driver installed for the screen display will be used. If
- "Use DOS console output" is set to NO then any resident
- driver installed for the screen display is IGNORED and
- PibTerm handles screen display by itself.
-
-
- Gossip Mode Gossip Mode
-
- Gossip mode is a special split-screen mode that allows you
- to chat with another remote user using PibTerm. The
- current display is split into two pieces: the top for
- characters received from the remote system, and the bottom
- for characters you type. This allows a conversation to take
- place electronically in a full-duplex fashion, i.e., both
- you and the remote system user can be entering text at the
- same time.
-
- You can also use gossip mode to separate what you type from
- what the remote system sends.
-
- Gossip mode is a dumb terminal mode -- escape sequences are
- NOT processed.
-
- To enter gossip mode, press
-
- <ALT>P,
- T)erminal,
- a) Terminal to emulate,
- e) Turn ON gossip mode.
-
- You exit gossip mode by typing the same sequence of
- characters.
-
- There are two types of gossip mode. In character mode, each character mode
- character is sent to the remote system immediately after you
- type it. This is the way the other terminal emulation modes
- operate as well.
-
- In line mode, an entire line of text is read, which you can line mode
- edit using the keypad editing features as much as you like,
- up to the point at which you enter the Enter or Return key. Enter Return
- This text will only be sent when either
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 54 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 54
-
-
-
- 1. the cursor in the top half of the screen (for text
- received from the remote system) lands in column
- one, or
-
- 2. you hit the Enter or Return key again. Enter Return
-
- Line mode is nice for online conferences -- you can easily
- distinguish what you type from what the other callers type.
-
- To select which gossip mode PibTerm is to use, press
-
- <ALT>P,
- T)erminal emulation,
- f) Use gossip line mode
-
- If "Use gossip line mode" is NO, then the character mode is
- used.
-
- Another good use for Gossip mode is when you and a remote
- caller want to exchange files when you are both sitting at
- your PCs. (Host mode is more convenient for unattended
- transfers or lengthy transfers.)
-
- When you are using gossip mode, you may find that each line
- received from the remote system overwrites the previous
- lines on the screen. This is because the remote system is
- not sending a line feed after each carriage return. To fix
- that, press
-
- <ALT>P,
- C)ommunications,
- g) Add linefeeds to incoming CRs
-
- Setting "Add linefeeds" to YES causes PibTerm to add the
- linefeeds to each incoming carriage return. That will
- correct the display overwrite problem.
-
-
- Graphics Terminal Emulation -- Tek 4010 Graphics Terminal Emulation -- Tek 4010
-
- PibTerm can emulate the display facilities of a Tektronix
- 4010 graphics terminal. PibTerm does NOT emulate the
- graphics input facilities of a Tektronix 4010 terminal.
-
- To enable graphics emulation, type the sequence
-
- <ALT>P,
- T)erminal,
- a) Terminal to emulate,
- g) Tektronix 4010.
-
- You must have a CGA (color graphics adapter), EGA (enhanced
- graphics adapter), or VGA (video graphics array) installed
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 55 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 55
-
-
- to request Tektronix 4010 mode. Hercules graphics are NOT Hercules graphics are NOT
- supported by PibTerm. supported by PibTerm.
-
- Tektronix 4010 emulation is supported by nearly all
- mainframe graphics packages, including DI 3000 and SAS/GRAPH
- on the ACNS mainframes.
-
- The status line is not displayed in Tektronix 4010 emulation
- mode.
-
- Incidentally, PibTerm menus are displayed in text mode even
- when Tek 4010 graphics mode is active. This often results
- in strange pyrotechnics on your screen in back of the menus
- or while switching from graphics mode to text mode. That is
- perfectly normal, so don't be alarmed when it happens.
-
- Most multitaskers don't support running graphics in the
- background, so you should only activate Tek 4010 emulation
- mode when Pibterm is running as the foreground task.
- However, DesqView will run CGA, but NOT EGA or VGA, graphics
- in the background on a PC equipped with an Intel 386
- processor. To support this, PibTerm allows you disable use
- of EGA/VGA graphics in Tek 4010 mode by setting the
- parameter at
-
- <ALT>P,
- V)ideo mode and colors;
- s) Allow EGA graphics mode
-
- to NO. CGA graphics will be used instead, which reduces
- resolution but which will run in the background in DesqView
- on a 386-equipped PC.
-
-
- File Transfers File Transfers
-
- PibTerm performs a wide variety of protocol file transfers.
- A protocol transfer sends error-checking information along protocol transfer
- with the data of the file being transmitted in order to
- provide as error-free a transmission as possible. (This
- information is not stored in the file on the receiving end;
- it is only used to check that the transmission occurred
- correctly.) A non-protocol transfer sends only the data,
- without any error-checking information. While a non-
- protocol transfer will generally proceed more quickly than a
- protocol transfer, the integrity of the transfer can be
- compromised by less-than-ideal communications circumstances,
- such as telephone line noise, added or dropped characters
- resulting from device overruns, and so on. YOU SHOULD YOU SHOULD
- ALWAYS USE A PROTOCOL FILE TRANSFER WHEN SENDING FILES TO OR ALWAYS USE A PROTOCOL FILE TRANSFER WHEN SENDING FILES TO OR
- RECEIVING FILES FROM THE ACNS MAINFRAMES. RECEIVING FILES FROM THE ACNS MAINFRAMES.
-
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 56 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 56
-
-
- How Protocols Work How Protocols Work
-
- In a file transfer protocol there is a sender and a sender
- receiver. The sender is the computer sending a file, and receiver
- the receiver is the computer which is receiving it. Both
- the sender and receiver must understand the same protocol in
- order for the communication (the file transfer) to proceed.
-
- A file transfer protocol usually adds two types of error-
- checking information to the data of the file itself:
-
- (1) Sequence information, like a block number; Sequence information
- (2) Integrity information, like a checksum or CRC. Integrity information
-
- The sender splits the file to be sent into a series of small
- pieces, usually called blocks or packets. Each block is
- assigned an identification number, and the data which
- comprises the block is subjected to a checksum or CRC checksum CRC
- (Cyclic redundancy check) operation. The block number, (Cyclic redundancy check)
- actual data, and file checksum or CRC are combined into one
- larger block and sent.
-
- The receiver looks at the block number and ensures that it
- is the next one expected. Then the receiver performs the
- same checksum/CRC operation on the data block as the sender
- performed. If the block number is wrong, or the receiver
- does not get the same error check value as the sender sent,
- then the receiver sends back a message to the sender
- indicating that that block was not received and requests
- retransmission.
-
- The sender retransmits each block until the receiver
- acknowledges its correct reception, or until a specified
- error threshhold is reached.
-
- When the block is correctly received, the receiver writes
- the data portion to its copy of the file, sends an
- acknowledgement to the sender that the block was correctly
- received, and waits for the next block be sent.
-
- This amounts to a conversation between the sending computer
- and the receiving computer. The sender transmits a part of
- the file (a block) and asks the receiver, "OK, did you get
- that block?" If the receiver says "Yes, I got that block,
- send me the next one" then the sender transmits the next
- block. If instead the receiver says "No, I didn't get that
- block, send it to me again" then the sender retransmits the
- same block until the receiver gets it correctly.
-
- Eventually the sender transmits an indication that the file
- is complete. In response to that, the receiver indicates
- that it has received the entire file correctly.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 57 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 57
-
-
- Note the start-and-stop nature of the file transfer process:
- the sender sends a block, waits for the receiver to
- acknowledge it, and then sends the next block. This is an
- example of a half-duplex protocol: only one side is half-duplex protocol
- "talking" at a time.
-
- Sometimes the delay between blocks can grow quite large.
- This occurs when the transmission is going through packet-
- switching networks, satellites, or other communications
- links in which the turnaround time for a message can be
- several seconds. In such cases, the amount of time spent
- waiting for block acknowledgements can exceed the time spent
- actually transmitting file data!
-
- To counter this, a number of full-duplex protocols have been full-duplex protocols
- developed. In these protocols, the sender transmits
- information continuously -- still in blocks, but the blocks
- are sent without waiting for the receiver to acknowledge
- each of them. The receiver gets a block and checks it for
- correctness as before; the receiver still returns an error
- indicator to the sender if a block is bad. However, the
- receiver overlaps sending back its reply with the reception
- of new data blocks. Both the sender and the receiver can
- therefore be "talking" to each other at the same time.
-
- In a full-duplex protocol, the sender may be many blocks
- ahead by the time the receiver signals that a previous block
- was not received correctly. In this case, the sender must
- back up in the file being transmitted and resend the bad
- block. Some protocols resend only the block in error. Other
- protocols send the block in error and all subsequent blocks,
- even if those were previously received correctly by the
- receiver.
-
- Most file transfer protocols have traditionally been half-
- duplex protocols. Perhaps the most famous of the half-
- duplex protocols are Xmodem and Kermit, both of which are
- discussed below.
-
- The most popular full-duplex protocols for PCs are Zmodem
- and sliding windows Kermit, which is a full-duplex variant
- of the traditional half-duplex Kermit protocol.
-
-
- Kermit Kermit
-
- One of the most popular protocol file transfer methods is
- Kermit. Kermit was developed at Columbia University in New
- York. Programs implementing the Kermit protocol exist for
- nearly all computers, regardless of size. Kermit is the
- standard protocol for file transfers on the ACNS mainframe
- systems. You can also use Kermit for transferring files
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 58 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 58
-
-
- between microcomputers, such as one IBM PC to another, or
- between the IBM PC and the Apple Macintosh.
-
- Kermit is the only protocol available in PibTerm that
- provides for transferring 8-bit binary files even when the
- transmission parameters are set for 7 bits. Kermit does
- this though the use of a "quoting" mechanism so that an 8-
- bit character is transmitted as a special marker character
- indicating the high-order bit is turned on and a second
- character containing the other seven bits. Kermit also
- includes a simple data compression algorithm which
- compresses repeated sequences of the same character to a
- single character and repeat count. This lessens the transfer
- time for files with large runs of similar characters -- for
- example, blanks in PASCAL or FORTRAN program files.
-
- Kermit can transmit a single file or a group of files. The
- version implemented in PibTerm can be used with a remote
- server, but PibTerm itself does not act as a Kermit server.
-
-
- Performance Considerations With Kermit Performance Considerations With Kermit
-
- Originally, Kermit was a half-duplex protocol that used very
- short (less then 94 characters) blocks. This rendered Kermit
- inefficient for transferring files between some types of
- systems, such as microcomputers and some mainframes.
- Recently, the Kermit protocol has been extended to provide
- two ways of improving Kermit's performance:
-
- (1) Allow longer blocks;
- (2) Allow full-duplex transmission through sliding
- windows.
-
- PibTerm implements both of these extensions to the basic
- Kermit protocol, although only one can be in effect at a
- time -- PibTerm does not do long blocks sliding windows. If
- the remote Kermit indicates that it can do both long blocks
- and sliding windows, PibTerm will elect to do sliding
- windows in preference to long blocks.
-
- Long blocks may be used on both the Cyber under NOS (but not
- NOS/VE) and the KGSM 4361. Long blocks are also available
- in the standard MSDOS MSKERMIT.EXE program and MacKermit
- (v0.9 or later).
-
- Sliding windows Kermit (sometimes called SuperKermit) may be
- used on many remote bulletin board systems, as well as with
- the Source (a commercial time-sharing service).
-
- To activate sliding windows Kermit in PibTerm, set the
- parameter at
-
- <ALT>P,
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 59 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 59
-
-
- K)ermit,
- m) Sliding windows size
-
- to a value greater than 0. The maximum sliding window size
- allowed is 31.
-
- To activate long blocks Kermit, set the parameter at
-
- <ALT>P,
- K)ermit,
- n) Maximum long block size
-
- to a value greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1000.
-
- If these values are set to zero, PibTerm will not negotiate
- sliding windows or long blocks.
-
-
- Types of Files Types of Files
-
- Most of the time you will be transferring text files from
- one machine to another. Text files contain standard Text files
- readable text. Typical text files are letters, reports,
- paper, source code for programs, and data files -- AS LONG
- AS THESE FILES DO NOT CONTAIN NON-STANDARD OR CONTROL CODES.
- Text files can be read, understood, and processed on both
- the originating machine and the receiving machine.
-
- Binary files are any files which can't be considered text Binary files
- files. Examples of binary files are executable code, or
- files produced by word processors saved in internal word-
- processing format. In general, binary files do not make
- sense to, and cannot be processed on, any type of machine
- other than that on which the file was created. For example,
- the Cyber cannot process a WordPerfect document file, nor
- can a PC process a Cyber executable program binary file.
-
- When transferring files, you will need to specify that a
- file is a binary file or a text file to BOTH the sending and
- receiving machines. By default, Kermit on the ACNS
- mainframes assumes that you are transferring text files, so
- you don't have to explicitly indicate that if you are indeed
- transferring a text file. Occasionally, however, you will
- be transferring a binary file. The most common type of
- binary file transferred on the ACNS mainframes is the SPSSX
- Export format file on the Cyber under NOS.
-
- Sending or receiving text files as binary files on the PC
- works just fine -- MS DOS doesn't really distinguish text
- from binary files. However, each of the ACNS mainframe
- systems do, and it is VERY IMPORTANT that the file type on
- the mainframes be set correctly.
-
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 60 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 60
-
-
- Uploading versus Downloading Uploading versus Downloading
-
- The process of receiving a file from a remote system is
- called downloading the file. The process of sending a file downloading
- to a remote system is call uploading the file. uploading
-
- To perform a protocol file transfer, set the remote system
- to understand the selected type of transfer. Then press
- <ALT>R to receive a file and select the corresponding type
- of protocol from the PibTerm menu. To send a file to the
- remote system, press <ALT>S and select the proper
- protocol. You will be prompted for file names as
- necessary.
-
-
- Using the Kermit protocol Using the Kermit protocol
-
- On the various ACNS machines, you should always select
- Kermit as the protocol of choice (this is the default
- protocol in PibTerm). To simplify choosing Kermit as the
- transfer method, the version of PibTerm provided by ACNS
- defines the IBM keypad PgUp key to be a request for a Kermit PgUp
- send file, and the IBM keypad PgDn key to be a Kermit PgDn
- receive file transaction. To perform a transfer using the
- Kermit protocol, do the following:
-
- 1. On the Cyber, use GET or ATTACH to make local files of GET ATTACH
- all the files you wish to download. GET is used for GET
- indirect files, and ATTACH is used for direct files. ATTACH
-
- 2. Execute Kermit on the remote system. On all the ACNS
- machines, you only need to enter:
-
- KERMIT KERMIT
-
- when the operating system asks for a command. For
- example, on a VAX/VMS system you usually invoke Kermit
- as follows:
-
- $ kermit kermit
- VMS Kermit-32 version 3.3.111
- Default terminal for transfers is: _VTA2192:
- Kermit-32>
-
- Vax Kermit is now awaiting keyboard input to tell
- it what to do.
-
- 3. Most mainframe Kermit programs default to Ascii or text
- files as the type of file to be transferred. This is
- true of all the ACNS mainframes. If you are
- transferring text-only files, then you do not need to
- tell the mainframes that you will sending or receiving
- text files -- that is understood by default.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 61 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 61
-
-
- However, some types of files must be
- transferred as binary files, and you
- must inform the mainframe of that. A
- common example is the transfer of SPSSX
- export files between the Cyber under NOS
- and the PC. To tell Cyber Kermit that
- you will be transferring a binary file
- like an SPSSX export file, issue the
- following command to Cyber Kermit:
-
- SET FILE BINARY SET FILE BINARY
-
- You must run CYTOPC on the SPSSX export
- file before downloading it, or PCTOCY on
- the uploaded export file before using it
- with SPSSX. See ACNS document #605 for
- further details on SPSSX export files on
- the Cyber.
-
-
- 4. Next you should activate the remote Kermit's ability to
- use long blocks if you have a clean phone line or you
- are using a hard-wired connection. This greatly
- improves the file transfer speed. At this time, Cyber
- Kermit under NOS and IBM CMS Kermit allow long blocks;
- the Vax does not. On the Cyber under NOS, issue the
- following commands to Cyber Kermit to activate long
- blocks:
-
- SET SEND PACKET 1000
- SET RECEIVE PACKET 1000
-
- On the IBM 4361 under CMS, you only need to issue one
- command to CMS Kermit:
-
- SET RECEIVE PACKET 1000
-
- 5. Place the remote system's Kermit into "Server Mode". By
- doing this you will be able to send or receive several
- files without restarting Kermit. To start server mode,
- type "server" to the remote Kermit.
-
- For example, with Vax/VMS Kermit, typing "server"
- results in a note like this:
-
- VMS Kermit-32 version 3.3.111
- Default terminal for transfers is: _VTA2192:
- Kermit-32>server server
- Kermit Server running on VAX/VMS host. Please type your escape
- sequence to return to your local machine. Shut down the server
- by typing the Kermit BYE
-
- 6. Press PgDn to receive a file from the remote system, or PgDn
- PgUp to send a file to the remote system. Pressing PgUp
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 62 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 62
-
-
- PgUp and PgDn automatically invokes Kermit using the
- ACNS-supplied key definitions files. You can skip down
- to step 8 if you hit PgUp or PgDn.
-
- More generally, you can press <ALT>R to receive a
- file from the remote system, or <ALT>S to send a file
- to the remote system. You will see a menu like the
- following appear (this one is for <Alt>R):
-
- ╒[ Choose file transfer protocol for receive: ]══════╕
- │ a) Ascii │
- │ b) Xmodem (Checksum) │
- │ c) Xmodem (CRC) │
- │ d) Kermit │ d) Kermit
- │ e) Telink │
- │ f) Modem7 (Checksum) │
- │ g) Modem7 (CRC) │
- │ h) Xmodem 1K │
- │ i) Xmodem 1K G │
- │ j) Ymodem Batch │
- │ k) Ymodem G batch │
- │ l) Zmodem │
- │ m) WXmodem │
- │ n) Rlink │
- │ o) SEALink │
- │ p) YTerm │
- │ │
- │ │
- │ │
- │ │
- │ │
- ╘════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- 7. Hit "d" to select Kermit. You will then see a menu
- like the following:
-
-
- ╒[ Choose Kermit function: ]══════════════╕
- │ a) GET Text File │ a) GET Text File
- │ b) GET Binary file │
- │ c) RECEIVE Text File │
- │ d) RECEIVE Binary File │
- │ e) Use PCKERMIT.EXE (now NO) │
- │ f) Finish Remote Server │
- │ l) Logout Remote Server │
- │ r) Remote Server Commands │
- │ t) Transfer to Send File Menu │
- │ q) Quit Kermit │
- ╘══════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
-
- Hit "a" to receive an Ascii text file from the remote
- system, or "b" to receive a binary file.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 63 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 63
-
-
- 8. You will then see a box like the following:
-
- ╒═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╕
- │ File to receive: │
- │ │
- ╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
-
- At this point, type the name of the file that you would
- like to receive. For example, suppose the file you
- want is called GAZORP.GOOMBLA on the Vax. You type
- that name at this point and hit the Enter (or Return)
- key. The Kermit transfer begins and you will see a
- status box like the following:
-
-
- ╒[ Receive file gazorp.goombla using Kermit ]══════════════════╕
- │ Packets received : │
- │ Bytes received : │
- │ Retries : │
- │ Bytes to receive : │
- │ Current block window : │
- │ 8th bit quoting : │
- │ Block check type : │
- │ Compression : │
- │ Sliding windows : │
- │ Long blocks : │
- │ Last status message : │
- │ │
- │ │
- │ ^F=abort file ^B=abort batch ^K=abort Kermit ^R=retry │
- ╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Since "gazorp.goombla" isn't a legal MS DOS file name,
- PibTerm will truncate the name to "gazorp.goo."
- Whenever PibTerm renames a file in this way, it
- displays the revised name on one of the message lines
- in the status box.
-
- Kermit is a batch file transfer protocol. That means batch file transfer protocol
- that Kermit can send or receive several files at one
- time. For example, you could have requested the file
- "gazorp.*", and the remote Kermit would have sent all
- files beginning with "gazorp."
-
- 9. When you've finished transferring all the files, select
- the "f) Finish Remote Server" menu item. This will
- close down the remote Kermit. You will see a status
- box like the one above indicating the progress of the
- "finish server" operation.
-
- 10. Select the "q) Quit Kermit" item on PibTerm's
- Kermit menu. This will return you to terminal mode.
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 64 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 64
-
-
- You may then need to type EXIT or QUIT to cause the
- Kermit on the remote system to stop executing.
-
- In the case of the Vax, type:
-
- Kermit-32>exit exit
-
- 11. On the Cyber, files are not automatically saved as
- permanent files by Kermit. You will need to issue SAVE
- statements to make the files you've uploaded permanent.
- To see what names Cyber Kermit has given your files,
- use the
-
- ENQUIRE,F.
-
- control statement. Generally, Cyber Kermit truncates
- all of your DOS file names to the first seven
- characters ignoring the period.
-
-
- Kermit Autodownload Kermit Autodownload
-
- It is possible to set up Kermit for autodownloading. What
- this means is that you can start a Kermit transfer on the
- remote system using Kermit SEND, and PibTerm, running in SEND
- terminal emulation mode, will start a Kermit receive
- automatically. You need not explicitly type <ALT>R or PgDn <ALT>R PgDn
- to begin the receive.
-
- To activate Kermit autodownloading, set the parameter at
-
- <ALT>P,
- K)ermit,
- p) Allow Kermit autodownload
-
- to YES.
-
- When you use autodownloading, the remote Kermit should NOT
- be placed in server mode. Instead, use SEND commands to SEND
- get the remote Kermit to send files.
-
- You should not activate autodownloading on poor phone
- connections because line noise can appear as the marker
- character (Ascii 01 = SOH) indicating the start of a Kermit
- autodownload. This can result in PibTerm initiating a bogus
- Kermit receive.
-
-
- Kermit between IBM PC and Apple Macintosh Kermit between IBM PC and Apple Macintosh
-
- You can use PibTerm on the PC and MacKermit on the Macintosh
- to transfer text files between the Macintosh and the IBM PC.
- If you have a Mac II, you'll need to have a copy of
- MacKermit v0.9 or later; earlier versions of MacKermit don't
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 65 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 65
-
-
- run on the Mac II. You can also use any other Macintosh
- communications program which supports Kermit, e.g., Red
- Ryder or VersaTerm Pro. However, MacKermit is especially
- useful because it will act as a Kermit server.
-
- You will also need a special cable to connect the serial
- port of the IBM PC to the phone port of the Macintosh. Such
- a cable is called a null modem adapter. The null modem null modem adapter
- allows two computers to be directly connected together
- without the use of a modem. This is necessary because both
- computers would otherwise be trying to transmit to each
- other's transmit line, and the receive lines would not be
- receiving anything. The null modem reverses the transmit
- and receive lines on one end of the serial cable so that the
- two computers can communicate.
-
- After connecting the Macintosh and the IBM PC serial ports,
- execute MacKermit on the Macintosh. Set the communications
- parameters as follows:
-
- Speed: 9600 baud
- Parity: None
- Data Bits: 8
- Stop Bits: 1
-
- Also set the packet size to be 1000 -- this activates long
- blocks for MacKermit, and will greatly enhance the transfer
- speed between the Mac and the PC.
-
- Set MacKermit to act as a Kermit server.
-
- On the PC, set the PibTerm communications parameters as
- follows:
-
- Speed: 9600 baud
- Parity: None
- Data Bits: 8
- Stop Bits: 1
- Hard-wired: Yes
-
- Alternatively, you can execute the script TOMAC.SCR TOMAC.SCR
- (provided in the PibTerm release materials) which will set
- these parameters for you. TOMAC will also prompt you for
- the name of the file to send to the Macintosh, and will then
- execute the Kermit transfer. The supplied script
- FROMMAC.SCR performs a reception of a file from the FROMMAC.SCR
- Macintosh.
-
- After you are finished with the transfers, you can end
- server mode on the Macintosh -- there's no need to issue the
- FINISH command from PibTerm to MacKermit.
-
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 66 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 66
-
-
- Kermit Protocol Parameters Kermit Protocol Parameters
-
- There are a number of other parameters for the Kermit
- protocol which you can set at
-
- <ALT>P,
- K)ermit
-
- besides those mentioned above. Usually you should not need
- to change any of the specified parameter values. However,
- if you are accessing Kermit on a non-ACNS machine, or
- through a network, you may find it necessary to alter some
- of the parameters. Some older Kermit programs on mainframes
- may not like to see long blocks or sliding windows requests,
- so you should set both
-
- <ALT>P,
- K)ermit,
- m) sliding windows size
- n) long blocks size
-
- to zero when accessing such systems. This prevents PibTerm
- from trying to negotiate either long blocks or sliding
- windows.
-
- Incidentally, the maximum sliding window size is 31, and the
- maximum long block size supported by PibTerm is 1000
- characters. PibTerm reduces any larger parameter values you
- enter to those values.
-
-
- Setting a download directory Setting a download directory
-
- You can instruct PibTerm to place all files received from a
- remote system into a specified subdirectory. This makes it
- easy to distinguish downloaded files from other files. It is
- also useful when you are downloading to another drive
- besides the current logged drive.
-
- To set the download directory path, press
-
- <ALT>P,
- P)aths,
- e) Download directory.
-
-
- Transfer Statistics Transfer Statistics
-
- PibTerm writes status messages to the display while a
- transfer is in progress, as noted above. In addition,
- PibTerm also writes any error indications to the review
- buffer (see the section "Scanning the review buffer") and to
- the various log files (see the section "Session Logging").
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 67 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 67
-
-
- This allows you to determine if a transfer succeeded or not
- without watching the entire transfer.
-
- For example, the log entries for a sample Kermit transfer
- might appear as follows:
-
- >> 88/01/18 02:39:41 Send file using Kermit
- >>+ 88/01/18 02:39:43 Sending file PIBTERM.PAS
- >>+ 88/01/18 02:39:43 Sending PIBTERM.PAS
- >>+ 88/01/18 02:40:49 NAK for packet 9 received.
- >>+ 88/01/18 02:41:17 Send completed.
- >>+ 88/01/18 02:41:17 Effective transfer rate was 78 CPS.
- >>+ 88/01/18 02:41:17 Actual transfer rate was 42 CPS.
- >> 88/01/18 02:41:27 FINISH remote server.
- >>+ 88/01/18 02:41:27 Remote server stopped.
-
- Here the file PIBTERM.PAS is being sent from the PC to the
- Vax. A line noise problem prevented packet 9 from being
- received correctly the first couple of times. The length of
- time before the error indication is indicative of the Vax
- having received a spurious XOFF flow control character
- caused by the line noise. Eventually PibTerm decided that
- this must be the problem and sent an XON to uncork the line
- again, at which point the transfer proceeded onwards towards
- completion. Note the low transfer rate because of the delay
- engendered by the faulty line conditions.
-
-
- File Transfer Trouble-Shooting With Kermit File Transfer Trouble-Shooting With Kermit
-
- Here are some of the most common reasons for Kermit file
- transfer failures.
-
- Problem: The file transfer never begins. Problem:
-
- What to do: What to do:
-
- a) Abort the transfer on PibTerm's end by hitting
- <CTRL>F. Wait a few seconds. If that doesn't
- seem to stop the transfer, try hitting <CTRL>K.
-
- b) If you see the message "XOFF received" on the
- status line, hit the ESC key a couple of times
- until the message disappears. Then try the
- transfer again.
-
- c) If you are using the PibTerm "GET filename"
- function (or you are hitting the PgUp or PgDn keys
- to transfer a file), then make sure that you've
- placed the mainframe Kermit in server mode.
-
- d) Check that you've spelled the name of the file to
- be transferred correctly. When sending a file,
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 68 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 68
-
-
- you specify the MS DOS file name. When receiving
- a file, you specify the name ON THE REMOTE SYSTEM.
-
- e) On the Cyber, make sure that you've made the file
- a local file using GET (for indirect files) or
- ATTACH (for direct files).
-
- f) Try the transfer again a couple of times.
-
-
- Problem: Kermit aborts while performing a transfer. Problem:
-
- What to do: What to do:
-
- a) If this is the first time in a session that you're
- using Kermit, and you get a message "illegal ASCII
- character" (or "block sequence error" on the Cyber)
- then the transfer will not work. This indicates a
- mismatch in the file type between the mainframe and the
- microcomputer. If you are transferring a binary file,
- make sure that you tell PibTerm to get/receive or send
- a binary file, and also tell the remote Kermit that the
- file type is binary. If you don't think you're
- transferring a binary file, then you may have given the
- wrong file name, or you may not understand what the
- format really is. See the previous section on file
- types for more details.
-
- A common mistake is to try to send a file containing an
- extended Ascii character (one whose numeric value is
- greater than 127) as a text file. Such characters are
- commonly used on the PC for drawing lines or boxes.
- While these extended Ascii characters are considered
- legal text by the PC, they are NOT considered legal
- text by the mainframes.
-
- b) If you didn't get the "illegal ASCII character" or
- "block sequence error" messages, then check that you've
- named the file correctly. Also ensure that the file is
- a local file if you're downloading from the Cyber. And
- check that you have enough disk space on the PC to
- receive a file when downloading. When sending to the
- Vax, make sure you have enough disk space there to
- receive the file from the PC. (If you get a message
- from Vax Kermit like "ACP File Extend Failed", then
- you've run out of disk space on the Vax.)
-
- c) If the second transfer attempt fails at the same point
- as the first transfer, then the file you're trying to
- send or receive may contain a character that can't be
- transferred. You may want to try the transfer one more
- time just to verify that it will indeed fail a third
- time at the same place. You'll need to check the
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 69 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 69
-
-
- contents of the file to figure out what the character
- is that's causing the problem.
-
- d) If the transfer aborts at different places each time,
- then the problem may be that the mainframe system is
- simply too busy. The Kermit protocol imposes a number
- of internal timeout checks to prevent transfers from
- hanging. On a busy system, the timeout periods may be
- exceeded and therefore Kermit will fail. You should
- try the transfer again at a later time when the
- mainframe system isn't so busy.
-
- e) If you're running a multitasking system on your PC --
- for example, DesqView or TaskView -- then try the
- transfer again with PibTerm the foreground task and NO
- other tasks running concurrently. You can also run
- into problems trying to transfer files if you're using
- a print spooler or if you are using a program (like a
- DOS visual shell) that displays a running time-of-day
- clock. These programs "steal" time from the serial
- communications handler for long enough periods of time
- that PibTerm misses seeing some characters. See the
- sections "PibTerm and multitasking software" and
- "Programs which conflict with PibTerm" for more
- details.
-
-
- Problem: Host won't respond to FINISH server request Problem:
-
- What to do: What to do:
-
- a) If the Cyber is the host machine, then q) quit Kermit
- to get back to NOS. Enter <CTRL>T followed by return.
- If this doesn't work the first time, try it again a
- couple of times. If this doesn't work, hit <CTRL>Q a
- couple of times. Then try <CTRL>T again. If this
- still doesn't work, you may need to detach and drop the
- job. Hit the sequence ESC, <CTRL>A, <CTRL>T to end your
- current CDCNET session. That will allow you to log in
- a new job. Use the ENQUIRE,JSN and DROP,JSN commands ENQUIRE,JSN DROP,JSN
- to get rid of the hung Kermit job (see the NOS manual
- for details). Any files that you uploaded and didn't
- get a chance to SAVE will be lost, and you'll have to
- transfer them again.
-
- b) If the Vax is the host machine, then q) quit Kermit to
- get back to VMS. Enter <CTRL>Y several times. If that
- doesn't work, you'll have to terminate the VMS session.
- Any files you uploaded prior to the problem file will
- be saved. To terminate your session, log in another
- job and use the DCL command STOP /ID=n, where "n" is STOP /ID=n
- the process identifier of the hung Kermit job. See the
- Vax command language reference manual for more
- information about the STOP command
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 70 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 70
-
-
-
-
- Other File Transfer Protocols Other File Transfer Protocols
-
- PibTerm provides a variety of other transfer protocols in
- addition to Kermit. These include several Xmodem-derived
- protocols, as well as non-protocol (Ascii) transfers. You
- may also connect external drivers for other protocols to
- PibTerm.
-
-
- Xmodem family Xmodem family
-
- Ward Christensen originated the Xmodem protocol many years
- ago as a simple solution to transferring files between two
- computer systems. Over the years, the Xmodem protocol
- developed into the de-facto standard for file transfers
- between microcomputers. Recently, many Xmodem-derived
- protocols have appeared which address a number of the
- limitations and performance problems of the original Xmodem
- protocol.
-
-
- Xmodem Xmodem
-
- Xmodem Checksum and Xmodem CRC are two common transfer
- methods for use with remote bulletin board systems and many
- mini-computer systems. These are single-file-at-a-time
- transfer methods. Files are transmitted in 128 character
- blocks along with the block number and checksum or cyclic
- redundancy check (CRC) information. This allows the
- receiving system to ensure that the transmission has
- occurred correctly to a very high degree of probability.
- The CRC error-checking method is superior to the Checksum
- method, so you should always use the CRC method if the
- remote system to which you are connected accepts it. RCPM,
- Fido, RBBS, PC Board, DBBS, TCOMM, RBBS, OPUS, PC Host, and
- many other bulletin board systems support Xmodem CRC.
-
- "Standard" Xmodem imposes very severe timing constraints on
- inter-character and inter-block transmission delays. Some
- systems which implement Xmodem require that these timing
- constraints be relaxed. You can change the timing
- parameters for Xmodem at
-
- <ALT>P,
- F)ile transfer,
- j) Xmodem parameters
-
- Few mainframe systems support Xmodem; CDC's NOS and NOS/VE
- are two that do. However, Kermit is still the protocol of
- choice for the CDC operating systems.
-
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 71 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 71
-
-
- Xmodem 1K Xmodem 1K
-
- Xmodem 1K is an Xmodem variant which provides for long 1024
- character blocks -- more efficient for higher baud rates
- like 2400, 4800, and 9600 baud. Like Xmodem and Xmodem CRC,
- Xmodem 1K only provides for the transfer of one file at a
- time.
-
- Because of some confusion over terminology, Xmodem 1K is
- sometimes referred to as Ymodem. However, Ymodem is
- actually a batch protocol that allows several files to be
- transmitted in sequence. See the discussion of Ymodem below
- for details.
-
- A variant of Xmodem 1K, called Xmodem 1K G in PibTerm, has
- been suggested for use with error-correcting modems. This
- protocol operates just like regular Xmodem but allows for a
- continuous flow of blocks to be transmitted by the sending
- computer. XON/XOFF flow control and/or CTS flow control are
- used to synchronize the two computer systems. This protocol
- relies on the two error-correcting modems to provide the
- necessary block retransmissions in case of error. However,
- if an error occurs between the modem and the microcomputer
- (which does happen), then Xmodem 1K G has to give up, since
- there is no provision for resending bad blocks under program
- control.
-
- In general, the Zmodem protocol (described below) is a
- better choice for a protocol to use with error-correcting
- modems, since it provides the streaming speed of Xmodem 1K G
- with error recovery and retransmission of bad blocks under
- program control.
-
-
- Modem7 Modem7
-
- Modem7 batch protocol is a variant of Xmodem which sends the
- file name before the file itself. This provides for sending
- a batch of files all at one time. Each file is preceded by
- the file name. Either checksum or CRC error-checking can be
- used with Modem7. BBS systems like RCP/M and Fido support
- Modem7 transfers, as do many Unix systems.
-
-
- Ymodem Ymodem
-
- Ymodem is another Xmodem variant which provides for sending
- the file name, creation time and date, and exact file size.
- This information is contained in a special "block 0" which
- is prepended to the actual data of the file itself. Ymodem
- allows for the transfer of several files at once. In
- general, the actual data part of a file is sent using Xmodem
- 1K-style long blocks with CRC error checking.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 72 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 72
-
-
- Ymodem was devised by Chuck Forsberg, who later devised the
- Zmodem protocol (see the section on Zmodem below).
-
- A variant of Ymodem, called Ymodem G in PibTerm, uses Xmodem
- 1K G (described above) to send files. It should only be
- used when error-correcting modems are present on both ends
- of the computer link. If any error occurs during a Ymodem G
- transfer, then the transfer is aborted.
-
-
- Telink Telink
-
- Telink is a variant of Modem7 proposed by Tom Jennings that
- adds information on file size and file creation time to the
- file name. PibTerm will use the file size and creation time
- information from Telink if it appears. Telink is most
- useful with FIDO bulletin board systems. PibTerm always
- requests the CRC version of Telink, since there is no reason
- to use the Checksum version.
-
- Incidentally, if you enter the wrong Xmodem variant protocol
- name, PibTerm will try and adjust as it receives blocks from
- the remote system. In other words, if the remote system
- decides to send the file using Telink, but you just say
- Modem7, PibTerm will adjust to Telink anyway. Likewise, an
- Xmodem 1K 1024-character block is automatically handled, as
- is the Ymodem header block if any, even if you say that you
- want an Xmodem transfer. Since PibTerm cannot always adjust
- properly, so it's best to tell it the proper transfer type
- to avoid problems.
-
-
- Mahoney BBS batch protocol Mahoney BBS batch protocol
-
- Bob Mahoney runs one of the largest BBSs (remote bulletin
- board systems) in the world out of suburban Milwaukee,
- Wisconsin. Several years back Bob added a batch version of
- Xmodem -- different from Modem 7 or Telink -- to his BBS
- software. This "autodownload" protocol is supported by
- PibTerm if you set the parameter at
-
- <ALT>P,
- F)ile transfer,
- b) Do EXEC PC BBS commands
-
- to YES.
-
- Since the EXEC PC BBS software now recognizes other
- protocols including Ymodem batch for autodownload, you
- should use Ymodem batch in preference to this older
- autodownload protocol because Ymodem is considerably faster.
-
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 73 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 73
-
-
- Other Xmodem family protocols Other Xmodem family protocols
-
- There are other Xmodem-derived protocols. Recently several
- variants of Xmodem which provide sliding windows like
- sliding windows Kermit have appeared. PibTerm does not
- incorporate these newer protocols directly, but you may add
- them using the facilities for defining external protocols.
- See the "PibTerm Parameters Reference Manual" for more
- details.
-
-
- Zmodem Zmodem
-
- An increasing number of bulletin board systems -- as well as
- Unix systems -- provide the Zmodem protocol. Zmodem is a
- full-duplex protocol that provides excellent throughput and
- exceptional error-recovery even on poor connections. Zmodem
- also allows you to restart a file transfer that aborted
- because of a dropped carrier. For example, suppose that you
- were transferring a 200K file, and after 120K the carrier
- dropped. With other file transfer protocols, you would need
- to restart the transfer from the beginning. With Zmodem it
- is possible to reconnect to the remote system and pick up
- the transfer where it left off, so that only the remaining
- 80K of the file needs to be sent, rather than the entire
- 200K all over again.
-
- PibTerm does not directly incorporate the Zmodem protocol.
- Instead, PibTerm interfaces to the standard DSZ transfer DSZ
- module written by Chuck Forsberg, the author of the Zmodem
- protocol. This interface is provided through two batch
- files, RECZMOD.BAT and SENDZMOD.BAT, using the PibTerm RECZMOD.BAT SENDZMOD.BAT
- facility for adding external file transfer protocol drivers
- to the standard <ALT>R and <ALT>S transfer menus. (See the
- section "Adding your own protocols" below.) These batch
- files are included as part of the PibTerm release materials.
- However, the DSZ program is NOT included. You can obtain a
- copy of DSZ from most of the better bulletin board systems
- or directly from the author at:
-
- Omen Technology
- P.O. Box 4681
- Portland, Oregon 97208
-
- If you order directly from Omen Technology then please
- include a check for $20 (US funds). (Credit card orders are
- also accepted for $25.) The $20 registers your copy of DSZ.
- DSZ is a shareware product, and you are expected to register
- it if you use it. DSZ is NOT free software! Even if you NOT
- download DSZ from a bulletin board system, you should send
- in the $20 registration fee.
-
- The registration diskette also contains Unix versions of the
- Zmodem protocol programs (SZ and RZ).
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 74 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 74
-
-
-
- It is possible to set up Zmodem for autodownloading. What
- this means is that you can start a Zmodem transfer on the
- remote system and PibTerm, running in terminal emulation
- mode, will recognize that a Zmodem receive should be
- started. (This is similar to the Kermit autodownload
- facility.) You do not explicitly need to issue an <ALT>R to
- begin the receive.
-
- To activate Zmodem autodownloading, set the parameter at
-
- <ALT>P,
- F)ile transfer,
- h) Allow Zmodem autodownload
-
- to YES.
-
- You should not activate autodownloading on noisy lines
- because line noise can appear as the marker character (Ascii
- 24 = CAN) indicating the start of an autodownload.
-
-
- Compuserve B Protocol Compuserve B Protocol
-
- Pibterm also incorporates the Compuserve B protocol (called
- CISB protocol for short) for use with CompuServe Information
- Services (CIS). PibTerm provides the latest "quick B"
- protocol which is a full-duplex sliding windows version of
- the B protocol. CompuServe B protocol is activated by
- special commands (escape sequences) sent from CompuServe to
- the PC. However, by default, PibTerm does not recognize
- those commands, since line noise can also cause Compuserve B
- protocol to be invoked falsely, and because in VT100 mode
- the escape sequences may invoke the VT100 answerback
- facility.
-
- To activate Compuserve B protocol, press
-
- <ALT>P,
- F)ile transfer,
- c) Do CompuServe B protocol
-
- and set the parameter value to YES. You should make sure
- that the "prompt for Vidtex" option at GO TERMINAL on
- CompuServe is set to NO, or CompuServe will issue Vidtex
- prompts which look like B protocol requests when you log in
- to CompuServe. This can result in a bogus display, or the
- start of a spurious file transfer.
-
- The CompuServe B Protocol code in PibTerm is based in part
- upon an implementation written by Russ Ranshaw, which in
- turn was based upon an implementation written by Steve
- Wilhite.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 75 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 75
-
-
-
- Automatic File Name Extraction For Transfers Automatic File Name Extraction For Transfers
-
- When you send a file to a remote system, you need to tell
- PibTerm the name of the file to be transferred. For the non-
- batch protocols, you also need to tell PibTerm the name of
- the file you are receiving from a remote system.
- Additionally, you may need to tell the remote system what
- file name to send or receive. Frequently this means that
- you type the file name twice: once to inform the remote
- system of the file name, and again to inform PibTerm of the
- file name.
-
- As a convenience, PibTerm scans what you've typed and
- extracts what it believes to be the file name you presented
- to the remote system. It does this by choosing as the file
- name a character sequence of the form "name.ext" where
- ".ext" is not all digits. PibTerm displays this possible
- file name as the default choice at the "Choose protocol"
- menus or "Choose file name" menu in Kermit.
-
- If you want to disable this automatic file name recognition
- facility, change the parameter at
-
- <ALT>P,
- F)ile transfer,
- g) Auto find file names
-
- to NO.
-
-
- Non-Protocol File Transfers Non-Protocol File Transfers
-
- PibTerm also provides non-protocol file transfers, sometimes
- called Ascii file transfers. A non-protocol transfer does
- NOT send any error checking information along with the data
- being transmitted, so that any errors encountered will NOT
- be detected or corrected. Hence, you should NOT use such
- transfers when the remote system provides for protocol
- transfers. Since all of the ACNS systems provide (at least)
- the Kermit protocol, you should use Kermit for all of your
- file transfers to and from ACNS systems.
-
- However, there are other systems which do not provide
- protocol transfers. On these systems non-protocol transfers
- are the only means of transferring data. Also, non-protocol
- transfers are useful for driving devices like plotters or
- linotype machines which do not understand protocol
- transfers. (These devices may require flow control like
- Xon/Xoff or CTS/RTS, however.)
-
- Another common use for a non-protocol transfer is to send
- short messages to the message facility of a remote system
- which does not allow protocol transfers in the message
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 76 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 76
-
-
- system. For example, many remote BBS systems allow you to
- leave messages, but very few allow you to upload messages
- using a protocol.
-
- To perform a non-protocol transfer, choose Ascii as the Ascii
- transfer type at the <ALT>R or <ALT>S menus.
-
- There are a number of parameters which affect the manner in
- which a non-protocol transfer is performed. These
- parameters appear at
-
- <ALT>P,
- F)ile transfer,
- i) Ascii transfer parameters
-
- Here is the resulting display:
-
- ╒[ Ascii transfer settings ]═══════════════════════════════════════════════════╕
- │ │
- │ a) Intercharacter delay : 0 │
- │ b) Interline delay : 0 │
- │ c) Pacing character : (Ascii 32) │
- │ d) Byte stream transfer : No │
- │ e) Maximum text line size : 255 │
- │ f) Send CR/LF sequence at end of line : No │
- │ g) Send empty line as blank : No │
- │ h) Send <CTRL>Z at end of transfer : Yes │
- │ i) Display text during transfer : No │
- │ j) Translate incoming characters : No │
- │ │
- │ Enter letter of item to revise or hit ESC to quit: │
- │ │
- ╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
-
- The a) intercharacter delay and b) interline delay allow you a) intercharacter delay b) interline delay
- to slow down the transfer to accomodate remote systems which
- have difficulty accepting large batches of characters all at
- once. By default, PibTerm sets both delays to zero, so that
- characters are sent at full speed to the remote system.
-
- The c) pacing character instructs PibTerm to wait until the c) pacing character
- selected character appears from the remote system before
- sending the next line of text. Specifying a blank as the
- pacing character (the default) indicates that no pacing is
- desired.
-
- Normally an Ascii file on MSDOS contains a series of text
- lines, each of which ends with carriage return (Ascii 13)
- and line feed (Ascii 10) characters. You may want to send a
- file that does not have that format. Setting d) byte stream d) byte stream
- transfer to YES causes PibTerm to send a file as a transfer
- continuous stream of characters, without regard to text line
- boundaries. This option is useful when sending a file to a
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 77 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 77
-
-
- plotter, linotype, or real-time data acquisition device.
- You can also receive a file as a byte stream transfer from
- such a device using this option. Generally you need to set
- some kind of hardware or software flow control, or use the
- intercharacter/interline delays, or specify pacing
- character.
-
- The e) maximum text line size which PibTerm allows is 255 e) maximum text line size
- characters per line. If you are sending or receiving a file
- with lines longer than 255 characters, set the d) byte d) byte
- stream transfer to YES and leave the maximum text line size stream transfer
- at 255.
-
- When receiving an Ascii text file, most remote systems
- automatically append line feeds to carriage returns. It
- isn't necessary to explicitly send the carriage return AND a
- line feed at the end of each text line -- only the carriage
- return is needed. If the remote system DOES require both a
- carriage return and a line feed, then set the value of f) f)
- Send CR/LF sequence at end of line to YES. Send CR/LF sequence at end of line
-
- Some remote systems like CompuServe or NOS interpret an
- empty line -- one consisting of just a carriage return -- as
- an end-of-input indicator. For those systems you may want
- to have PibTerm change empty lines to lines containing a
- blank, which avoids the end-of-input problem. To do this,
- set the value of g) Send empty line as blank to YES. g) Send empty line as blank
-
- Some systems like the Vax will accept a <CTRL>Z as an end-
- of-file marker. (MSDOS programs often do as well for text
- files.) If the remote system wants a <CTRL>Z to mark the
- end-of-file, then set h) Send <CTRL>Z at end of transfer to h) Send <CTRL>Z at end of transfer
- YES.
-
- To see the transfer in progress set i) Display text during i) Display text during
- transfer to YES. Note, however, that this option assumes transfer
- that the remote system is echoing back the characters
- PIbTerm sends. If that is not the case, you should use
- <ALT>E to toggle local echo ON during the transfer. Also
- note that turning on the display slows down the transfer
- considerably.
-
- When PibTerm is receiving an Ascii file, you will need to
- use <ALT>R to stop the transfer when it is actually
- complete. PibTerm cannot do this automatically since it
- does not know where the actual end of the received data is.
- When sending a file, PibTerm stops at the end of the file on
- the PC.
-
- Because of the buffering that both PibTerm and many modems
- use when sending files, you may find that the Ascii transfer
- display disappears before the remote system has actually
- received the entire file. This is because the last part of
- the file to be sent is still sitting in the outbound serial
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 78 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 78
-
-
- port buffer or the modem's buffer. This is normal and
- should not be cause for alarm.
-
- If you want the current translate table (defined at <ALT>T)
- to affect Ascii file receives, set j) Translate incoming j) Translate incoming
- characters to YES. Normally, Ascii file transfers IGNORE characters
- the current translate table setting. And, the translate
- table has not effect when sending a file.
-
-
- External File Transfer Protocols External File Transfer Protocols
-
- An external file transfer protocol is one which is not
- built-in to PibTerm itself, but can be accessed by executing
- an auxilliary program which performs the transfer. A number
- of such auxilliary programs currently exist: DSZ for Zmodem
- (and Xmodem and Ymodem too); MLINK.COM for MegaLink;
- CLINK.COM for SEALink; PCKERMIT.EXE for sliding windows
- Kermit; and so on.
-
- There are two ways to add an external file transfer protocol
- to PibTerm. The first is to write a script to be executed
- when the external protocol is invoked. The second is to
- write a batch file to be executed when the external protocol
- is invoked. The script approach allows more flexibility,
- but is much more work to set up. This section only
- describes the batch file approach; see the "PibTerm Script
- Language Reference Manual" for details on the script
- approach.
-
- Once you have added the external protocol to PibTerm, you
- can access it at <ALT>R and <ALT>S just like the built-in <ALT>R <ALT>S
- protocols. You can also specify an external protocol should
- be the default protocol for a specific dialing directory
- entry, just as you can specify one of the built-in
- protocols. In other words, there is no difference between
- using a built-in protocol and using an external protocol
- once you have defined the external protocol properly to
- PibTerm.
-
-
- Steps in Adding a User-Defined Protocol Steps in Adding a User-Defined Protocol
-
- Here are the steps in adding an external file transfer
- protocol to PibTerm.
-
- Step 1: Find a suitable auxilliary program. Step 1: Find a suitable auxilliary program.
-
- For illustration, the MegaLink protocol module MLINK.COM
- written by Paul Meiners will be used here. The MLINK.COM
- module is available on a many bulletin boards; it is NOT
- included as part of the PibTerm release materials. MLINK.COM
- is a shareware product.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 79 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 79
-
-
- Step 2: Construct configuration file entry for protocol Step 2: Construct configuration file entry for protocol
-
- Do an
-
- <Alt>P,
- F)ile transfer,
- n) external protocol definitions.
-
- You will see a display like this one:
-
-
- ╒[ External transfer protocol definitions ]════════════════════════════════════╕
- │ │
- │ Protocol Name Abbrev. Batch Mode Host Mode Receive Script Send Script │
- │ │
- │ a) Zmodem ZM YES YES RECZMOD.BAT SENDZMOD.BAT│
- │ b) ** Unused ** │
- │ c) ** Unused ** │
- │ d) ** Unused ** │
- │ e) ** Unused ** │
- │ f) ** Unused ** │
- │ g) ** Unused ** │
- │ h) ** Unused ** │
- │ i) ** Unused ** │
- │ j) ** Unused ** │
- │ │
- │ Enter letter of item to revise or hit ESC to quit: │
- │ │
- ╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
-
- One external protocol is pre-defined in the ACNS release
- materials for PibTerm -- Zmodem. This leaves nine available
- slots for other protocols.
-
- There are six items needed to define an external protocol,
- as indicated by the six columns in the menu display above.
-
- First is the protocol name -- in this case, MegaLink. This First
- is the name which will be displayed at <ALT>R or <ALT>S in <ALT>R <ALT>S
- the file transfer protocol menu and in section two of the
- dialing directory display.
-
- Second is a two-letter abbreviation for the protocol. The Second
- abbreviation MUST have two non-blank characters. This is
- the abbreviation which is used in the dialing directory file
- PIBTERM.FON and in the script commands Send and Receive (see Send Receive
- the "PibTerm Script Language Reference Manual" for details).
-
- The following two-letter abbreviations are already taken and
- can't be used:
-
- AS, XK, XC, KE, TE, MK, M7, X1, XG, YB, YG, NO
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 80 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 80
-
-
- In addition, ZM is taken by the Zmodem definition supplied ZM
- with the PibTerm release materials.
-
- We'll choose the letters ML for MegaLink. ML
-
- Third, we need to indicate if the protocol is a batch Third
- protocol which sends the file names as part of the transfer
- when a receive from the remote system is done. If so,
- PibTerm does not need to prompt for the file name when the
- external protocol is chosen. (For example, PibTerm doesn't
- prompt for the filename to receive for the built-in protocol
- Ymodem batch.)
-
- Fourth, we need to indicate whether or not the protocol can Fourth
- be executed by a non-privileged user in host mode. Internal
- protocols built-in to PibTerm check file transfer requests
- against entries in the PIBTERM.XFR file. (See the section PIBTERM.XFR
- "On Being A Host" for more details about host mode in
- PibTerm.) External protocols do not perform this check
- since they don't know anything about the PIBTERM.XFR file. PIBTERM.XFR
- These external protocols should not be allowed to execute
- from host mode to avoid security problems, and you should
- answer N to the question "Allow this protocol in host mode?" N
- However, some external protocol modules do provide a
- facility for restricting files to be transferred to a
- specific subdirectory. If you specify a host mode upload
- directory and a host mode download directory, and the
- external protocol handler allows you to specify transfers
- to/from only those subdirectories, then you can allow the
- external protocols to execute in host mode with an
- acceptable level of security. As it happens, the Megalink
- driver MLINK.COM does allow you to specify the subdirectory
- in which to place received files, but MLINK.COM does NOT
- allow you to specify a directory to restrict files to be
- sent. So we answer "N" to the "Allow this protocol in host
- mode?" question. (Incidentally, a privileged user can
- execute any of the defined protocols without regard to this
- setting.)
-
- Fifth, we need to provide the name of a PibTerm script or Fifth
- batch file to be executed when a file is to be received from
- a remote system with the external protocol. The script or
- batch file contains all the necessary instructions to
- execute the external protocol module. WE MUST WRITE THIS
- SCRIPT/BATCH FILE OUTSELVES. For Megalink, we will call the
- receive file batch file RECMLINK.BAT. RECMLINK.BAT
-
- Sixth, we need to provide the name of a PibTerm script or Sixth
- batch file to be executed when a file is to be sent to the
- remote system. Again, we need to write this script or batch
- file ourselves. For MegaLink, we will call the send file
- batch file SENDMLIN.BAT. SENDMLIN.BAT
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 81 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 81
-
-
- Referring back to the menu display above, hitting 'b' to
- choose the first empty slot produces the following sub-menu:
-
- ╒[ Revise Protocol: ]╕
- │ P)rotocol name │
- │ A)bbreviation │
- │ B)atch mode │
- │ H)ost mode allowed │
- │ R)eceive script │
- │ S)end script │
- ╘═════════════════════╛
-
- Select each item in turn and enter the six required pieces
- of information:
-
- P)rotocol name --- MegaLink
- A)bbreviation --- ML
- B)atch mode --- Yes
- H)ost mode --- No
- R)eceive script --- RECMLINK.BAT
- S)end script --- SENDMLIN.BAT
-
- Even though the prompts are for R)eceive script and S)end R)eceive script S)end
- script, you enter the names of the batch files. If you do script
- not explicitly enter the .BAT ending, then PibTerm assumes
- that you are going to use scripts instead of batch files.
-
- Hit the ESC key to get out of this menu when all the
- information is stored. (You can also update existing
- information using this menu. For example, you can change
- the definition of Zmodem if you like.)
-
- After adding the information, the screen looks like this:
-
- ╒[ External transfer protocol definitions ]════════════════════════════════════╕
- │ │
- │ Protocol Name Abbrev. Batch Mode Host Mode Receive Script Send Script │
- │ │
- │ a) Zmodem ZM YES YES RECZMOD SENDZMOD │
- │ b) Megalink ML YES YES RECMLINK SENDMLIN │
- │ c) ** Unused ** │
- │ d) ** Unused ** │
- │ e) ** Unused ** │
- │ f) ** Unused ** │
- │ g) ** Unused ** │
- │ h) ** Unused ** │
- │ i) ** Unused ** │
- │ j) ** Unused ** │
- │ │
- │ Enter letter of item to revise or hit ESC to quit: │
- │ │
- ╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 82 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 82
-
-
- Line b) now reflects the MegaLink definition. Hit ESC to b)
- get out of this menu, hit ESC again to get out of the F)ile F)ile
- transfer submenu, and choose W)rite config file to write a transfer W)rite config file
- new configuration file which will contain the MegaLink
- definition.
-
-
- Step 3: Write Batch Files For Send and Receive Operations Step 3: Write Batch Files For Send and Receive Operations
-
- The parameters to batch files for external transfers are as
- follows:
-
- %1 --- serial port number (1, 2)
- %2 --- speed of connection (2400, 9600, etc.)
- %3 --- parity (N, E, etc.)
- %4 --- data bits (7,8)
- %5 --- transfer directory
- %6 --- file spec for transfer
-
- The same parameters are passed for all protocols, both for
- sending files and receiving files.
-
- When PibTerm executes the batch file, the current directory
- is saved before the transfer and restored after it. If a
- specific upload/download directory is used, then PibTerm
- moves to it before executing the batch file. (The directory
- choice takes account of whether or not the current PibTerm
- session is in host mode or not.) Because Pibterm moves to Because Pibterm moves to
- the upload or download directory, it is extremely important the upload or download directory, it is extremely important
- that both the external protocol program (e.g., MLINK.COM) that both the external protocol program (e.g., MLINK.COM)
- and the batch files to invoke it (e.g., RECMLINK.BAT, and the batch files to invoke it (e.g., RECMLINK.BAT,
- SENDMLIN.BAT) be placed in subdirectories along the DOS SENDMLIN.BAT) be placed in subdirectories along the DOS
- PATH=. PATH=.
-
- To write the batch files for MegaLink we need to know the
- parameters expected by the external protocol module. The
- MLINK.COM program takes argument of the form:
-
- MLINK PORT n SPEED s RM download_directory
- MLINK PORT n SPEED s SM
-
- where 'n' is the communications port number, 's' is the baud
- rate of the connection, RM indicates files are being
- received, SM indicates files are being sent, and
- 'download_directory' is the name of the PibTerm download
- directory.
-
- For example, to receive files at 2400 baud over port 1, the
- MLINK.COM invocation should be:
-
- MLINK PORT 1 SPEED 2400 RM C:\DOWNLOAD
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 83 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 83
-
-
- assuming that the PibTerm download directory is
- 'C:\DOWNLOAD', while to send files over port 2 at 1200 baud
- the MLINK.COM invocation should be:
-
- MLINK PORT 2 SPEED 1200 SM
-
- Given this information, the receive .BAT file for MegaLink
- can be written as:
-
- MLINK PORT %1 SPEED %2 RM %5
-
- and the send .BAT file can be written as
-
- MLINK PORT %1 SPEED %2 SM
-
-
-
- Hanging Up The Phone -- <ALT>H Hanging Up The Phone -- <ALT>H
-
- Generally you need not hang up the phone explicitly (using
- <ALT>H) at the end of a PibTerm session, since most remote
- systems (including ACNS systems) hang up the phone on their
- end when you log out. However, sometimes you may run into
- trouble if, for example, the remote system fails but does
- not hang up the phone. In this case you need to explicitly
- hang up the phone. To do that, hit the <ALT>H.
-
- When you strike <ALT>H, PibTerm first attempts to hang up
- the phone by dropping the DTR line. If that fails, PibTerm
- then tries sending the "Modem hang up string" defined at
-
- <ALT>P,
- M)odem and dialing,
- h) Hang Up string
-
- For Hayes-style modems, the hang up string is ATH0. ATH0
-
-
- Exiting PibTerm -- <ALT>X Exiting PibTerm -- <ALT>X
-
- Before exiting PibTerm, make sure to log off the remote
- system to which you are connected. Then press <ALT>X to exit
- PibTerm. Note that PibTerm doesn't necessarily hang up the
- phone when you press <ALT>X. You may configure PibTerm to
- hang up the phone automatically when you leave PibTerm, or
- you may hang up the phone by pressing <ALT>H before pressing
- <ALT>X.
-
- To configure PibTerm to hang up the phone automatically when
- you exit, press
-
- <ALT>P,
- C)ommunications,
- l) Drop DTR at end.
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 84 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 84
-
-
-
- If you have the DTR (data terminal ready) line on your modem
- set NORMAL (as it should be), setting the above parameter to
- YES will cause PibTerm to hang up the phone automatically
- when you hit <ALT>X to quit PibTerm. If you have the DTR
- line set HIGH, then PibTerm may not be able to hang-up the
- phone line.
-
- If you are in the middle of executing a script, note that
- you will have to type <ALT>X twice -- once to exit the
- script, and a second time to exit PibTerm.
-
-
- On Being A Host -- <ALT>W On Being A Host -- <ALT>W
-
- PibTerm provides simple host mode facilities for message
- exchange and file transfer. PibTerm can be used as a
- very simple remote bulletin board, or it can provide you
- with limited remote access to your PC. PibTerm incorporates
- password security to prevent unauthorized callers, but this
- security is not as extensive as that provided by dedicated
- bulletin-board programs. PibTerm host mode is really
- intended to cover the need for a simple remote facility for
- an individual or a small private group of users who are all
- "nice people."
-
- PibTerm host mode assumes a Hayes-compatible modem.
-
- To invoke host mode after entering PibTerm, hit
- <ALT>W. PibTerm always logs the activity in host mode to the
- file PIBTERM.LOG so you have a record of what went on during PIBTERM.LOG
- a host session.
-
-
- Single-user and multiple-user access Single-user and multiple-user access
-
- There are two ways to use host mode. The first is to enter
- <ALT>W without creating any special host mode files. This
- initiates single-user host mode. The second is to create
- the host mode files so that multiple callers can access your
- machine. This initiates multiple-user host mode.
-
-
- Using Host Mode In Single User Access Using Host Mode In Single User Access
-
- Hit <ALT>W to enter host mode without creating any special
- host-mode configuration files. When you do this, PibTerm
- responds by displaying the following:
-
- No user file present, single user mode assumed.
- Enter first name:
-
- The first message indicates that you have not created a user
- file for host mode. (We'll discuss this momentarily when we
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 85 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 85
-
-
- talk about multiple users for host mode.) Then PibTerm asks
- you for the name with which you will be calling it from
- another computer. So, enter your first name. PibTerm will
- then prompt for your last name and then a password. You
- will need to provide PibTerm with the password when you call
- in from another system. This provides some security against
- unauthorized access to your PC when it is running in host
- mode.
-
-
- Entering a name and password Entering a name and password
-
- Enter first name: Philip Philip
- Enter last name: Burns Burns
- Enter password: mypass mypass
-
- Allow superuser privileges (Y/N)?
-
-
-
- Superusers versus ordinary users Superusers versus ordinary users
-
- There are two kinds of users allowed by PibTerm host mode:
- ordinary users, whose access to your system in host mode is
- fairly restricted, and superusers, who can do just about
- whatever they want to do, to your system from a remote
- machine. If you intend to be the only user, or you need to
- access DOS from a remote machine, then type Y in response to Y
- the "Allow superuser privileges" question.
-
-
- Initial host mode messages Initial host mode messages
-
- After you respond to the superuser question, PibTerm resets
- the modem to answer an incoming call, and then displays the
- following set of messages:
-
- No messages in message base.
-
- Waiting for phone to ring.
- Hit ESC key to return to terminal mode.
- F1 starts/stops chat mode.
- F2 immediately logs out remote user.
- F3 jumps to DOS.
- F4 undims screen afters it has been dimmed.
- F5 gives name of current caller.
- Hit any other key to start local host session.
-
-
-
- The status line in host mode The status line in host mode
-
- The above information also appears on the line above the
- status line in host mode, to remind you of the commands
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 86 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 86
-
-
- after they have scrolled off the screen. The status line
- itself will display what the current function is that is
- being performed in host mode.
-
- Here is a sample status line:
-
- ESC=quit F1=chat F2=logout F3=DOS F4=undim F5=caller CR=start local
- Host Mode 2:34 -CA -PR +LO -LF -LE +XO -CT -CD COM2 2400N81 Wait for call
-
- At this point PibTerm is ready for you to dial in from
- another computer.
-
-
- Starting a host-mode session Starting a host-mode session
-
- Once PibTerm is in host mode, NO PIBTERM <ALT>-key COMMANDS NO PIBTERM <ALT>-key COMMANDS
- are recognized. You can hit the ESC (escape) key to return are recognized.
- to terminal emulation mode (between calls only), or you can
- hit the Enter (Return) key to start a host-mode session
- right at your PC. When a remote session is in progress, you
- can enter data at the keyboard, which will appear to
- PibTerm as if the remote user had typed the entry.
-
- You can call your machine from another remote machine. When
- PibTerm receives a call, it waits for the modem to
- answer the phone. PibTerm then determines the calling
- characteristics (speed and parity) of the caller.
-
-
- Welcome message in host mode Welcome message in host mode
-
- After determining the proper transmission speed, PibTerm
- issues a short welcome message which looks like:
-
- PibTerm Version 4.1 Production.
- Released February 26, 1988.
- Beginning Remote Communications
-
- Test if line feeds required ...
-
- Are these lines O V E R P R I N T I N G ?
-
-
- The remote caller may see these lines as above, or the lines
- may be overprinting on the remote terminal. If the lines
- are NOT overprinting, then N should be entered as a
- response to the "... overprinting ?' question. If the lines
- ARE overprinting, then Y should be entered. PibTerm will
- then send line feeds as necessary to the remote user.
-
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 87 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 87
-
-
- Entering user name and password from remote system Entering user name and password from remote system
-
- Following this, PibTerm prompts for the first name, last
- name, and password which you entered after first hitting
- <ALT>W to enter host mode:
-
- Enter first name: philip philip
- Enter last name: burns burns
- Enter Password: ......
-
- The entries MUST be made on separate lines; you CANNOT
- enter the first and last name on one line. If either
- the user name or password is incorrectly entered, then
- PibTerm issues the prompt again, a maximum of three times.
- If the information is not provided correctly on the last
- try, then PibTerm hangs up the phone.
-
- The case for the first and last names is irrelevant; any
- combination of upper and lower case is acceptable (i.e.,
- Philip = PHILIP = PhIlIp). However, PASSWORDS ARE CASE PASSWORDS ARE CASE
- SENSITIVE!! This means that Mypass, MYPASS, and MyPass are SENSITIVE!!
- ALL DIFFERENT PASSWORDS.
-
- REPEATING: Passwords ARE case-sensitive! REPEATING: Passwords ARE case-sensitive!
-
- PibTerm echoes each character in the password with a dot
- rather than echoing the actual characters of the password.
- This is a security feature.
-
- After successfully entering the password, you'll see the
- following messages:
-
- Password OK
-
-
- Scanning for personal messages ...
- No messages in message file.
-
- Finished scanning messages, hit <CR> to continue:
-
-
- If there are any messages addressed to the caller, then the
- message headers of those message are displayed. Usually
- there won't be any messages in single-user mode, since you
- generally don't send messages to yourself.
-
-
- Main host-mode menu Main host-mode menu
-
- Host mode provides two menu sections: a main menu for
- message entry, and a secondary menu for file transfers. The
- main menu appears as follows:
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 88 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 88
-
-
- ======================================================
- = PibTerm Host Mode Main Menu =
- ======================================================
-
- E=Enter message
- R=Read message
- S=Scan messages
- P=Personal message scan
- Q=Quit and logoff
- F=File transfers
- G=Gossip mode
- X=Expert mode
- C=Send comments
- W=Read welcome message
- J=Jump to DOS
-
- ======================================================
- Enter command ?
-
- When you see the "Enter command ?" you can enter one of the
- command letters. No carriage return is needed.
-
- E enters a message in the message base. E enters
- R reads a message. R reads
- S scans and lists message numbers and headers. S scans
- P scans for private messages addressed to caller. P private
- Q quits the host session and logs off the caller. Q quits
- F enters the file transfer section (see below). F file transfer
- G enters a "gossip" mode. G "gossip"
- X turns on eXpert mode by suppressing long menus. X eXpert
- C sends private comment to the host system operator. C comment
- W reads the initial welcome messages if any. W welcome
- J jumps to DOS if superuser privileges are active. J jumps
-
-
- Gossip Mode Gossip Mode
-
- "Gossip" mode allows the remote caller and the host system
- operator to "chat" with each other. To the host system
- operator, this appears as a split-screen, with the remote
- caller's text going into the upper half of the screen, and
- the host system operator's text going into the lower half of
- the screen.
-
- When a remote caller hits the G to initiate gossip mode, G
- then PibTerm begins issuing a stream of beeps for up to
- thirty seconds on the host machine. If you want to chat
- with the caller, you can start typing and a gossip session
- will begin. To end a gossip session, hit <CTRL>X.
-
- If you want to disable gossip mode then you should set mute
- mode using <ALT>M BEFORE entering host mode. See the
- section "Mute mode" for more information.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 89 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 89
-
-
-
- Host mode file transfer menu Host mode file transfer menu
-
- The file transfer menu appears when F is entered at the F
- main host mode menu:
-
- ======================================================
- = PibTerm Host Mode File Transfer Menu =
- ======================================================
-
- U=Upload file
- D=Download file
- L=List files for transfer
- J=Jump to DOS
- M=Return to main menu
- Q=Quit and logoff
- X=Expert mode
-
- ======================================================
- Enter command ?
-
- U sends (uploads) a file to PibTerm. U uploads
- D receives (downloads) a file from PibTerm. D downloads
- L lists the files available for transfer. L lists
- J jumps to DOS if superuser privileges are active. J jumps
- M returns the caller to the main menu. M main
- Q quits the host session and logs off the caller. Q quits
- X turns on eXpert mode and short prompts. X eXpert
-
- In host mode, PibTerm looks for input from either the host
- system keyboard or the remote system. Thus, you can run a
- "remote" session from the host machine's keyboard itself.
- This feature also allows you to enter commands to complete
- what a remote user has input. For example, if you see that a
- user has trouble entering the correct name of a file for a
- download, then you can type it in for him.
-
- If you have ever used bulletin board systems like RBBS or
- IBBS, then you should have no trouble understanding how to
- use PibTerm host mode.
-
-
- What Programs Can Be Executed Remotely What Programs Can Be Executed Remotely
-
- Not all programs can be executed remotely. Only programs
- which do all of their screen I/O using standard MS DOS calls
- can be run remotely after you jump to DOS using J. Such J.
- programs include most MS DOS commands and many utilities,
- but unfortunately, very few applications programs. For
- example, you can not run Lotus 123 or WordPerfect remotely you can not run Lotus 123 or WordPerfect remotely
- using PibTerm. using PibTerm
-
- PibTerm uses the MS DOS CTTY facilities to implement jump to CTTY
- DOS in host mode. The standard CTTY driver for the serial
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 90 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 90
-
-
- ports has the disconcerting property of not letting you see
- what a remote caller is doing when the remote caller has
- jumped to DOS. Nor can you enter any keyboard input.
-
- One way around this is to use an alternate CTTY driver. Two
- popular alternatives are the IBMAUX drivers written by Gee
- Wong and the GATEWAY drivers written by Hans D. Kellner.
- (There are other substitute drivers as well.) Using either
- of these drivers allows you to see what a remote caller is
- doing after dropping to DOS, and you can also enter keyboard
- input which is accepted as if the remote caller had typed
- it. The enhanced security and flexibility of these
- alternate CTTY drivers makes them well worth acquiring.
-
- Both IBMAUX and GATEWAY are widely available on bulletin
- board systems. You install the drivers in your CONFIG.SYS
- file. For details, see the documentation provided in the
- files containing the drivers.
-
- To get PibTerm to use one of the alternate drivers you need
- to enter the name of the driver at
-
- <ALT>P,
- H)ost mode,
- g) CTTY driver name prefix
-
- The default CTTY driver name COM invokes the standard MS DOS COM
- driver. For Wong's IBMAUX, use the name AUX. For Gateway, AUX
- use the name GATE. GATE
-
- The ACNS release materials for PibTerm do NOT include these
- alternate drivers, since they are not ACNS software.
- GATEWAY is a shareware product and you are expected to pay
- for it and register it if you use it.
-
- Incidentally, some multitaskers and screen enhancers do not
- allow you to use CTTY. In these cases, you will not be able
- to jump to DOS remotely in host mode.
-
-
- Setting Up Multiple-User Host Mode Setting Up Multiple-User Host Mode
-
- Setting up multiple-user host mode is quite straightforward.
- You need to create a user file called PIBTERM.USF. PIBTERM.USF
- PIBTERM.USF is a simple text file containing the first name,
- last name, and password for each authorized user. This file
- can be created using any text editor that produces Ascii
- files, including the built-in PibTerm text editor.
-
- The format of PIBTERM.USF is:
-
- firstname;lastname;password;class
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 91 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 91
-
-
- where semicolons separate the first name, last name, and
- password. The class field is optional; if specified, a class
- capital S indicates that the user is a superuser. If S is S S
- not specified, then that user is not a superuser, and cannot
- jump to Dos remotely.
-
- You should also define the host mode upload and download
- paths at
-
- <ALT>P,
- P)aths,
- h) Host mode upload directory
- i) Host mode download directory
-
- The upload path is the name of the subdirectory where files upload path
- sent to PibTerm in host mode will be placed. The download download
- path is the name of the subdirectory which contains files path
- which PibTerm will send to remote users. Only files in this Only files in this
- download path are accessible to callers who are not download path are accessible to callers who are not
- superusers. superusers.
-
- The file PIBTERM.XFR should contain the names of the files PIBTERM.XFR
- in the host mode download path which you are willing to let
- people receive. If PIBTERM.XFR does not exist, PibTerm will
- create it for you. Delete PIBTERM.XFR every time you add or Delete PIBTERM.XFR every time you add or
- delete files from the host mode download directory so that delete files from the host mode download directory so that
- PibTerm can create an up-to-date PIBTERM.XFR. This is the PibTerm can create an up-to-date PIBTERM.XFR
- file which PibTerm lists in response to the L command in the L
- file transfer menu.
-
- You can create a text file which contains a welcome message
- of your own which will be displayed after the caller logs in
- successfully. Place the text you want displayed in the file
- PIBTERM.WEL. PIBTERM.WEL
-
- One caller can send a message to another by specifying the
- other caller's name when writing a message.
-
-
- Scripts: Tailored Task Handling Scripts: Tailored Task Handling
-
- PibTerm provides an extended script file facility which
- allows you to create a file containing a set of instructions
- for PibTerm to execute. The script can dial a remote system,
- perform file transfers, and wait for a specific time to
- initiate an event, among many other things. Scripts allow
- you to set up PibTerm to run in an unattended mode and take
- advantage of off-hours rates on host computer systems, as
- well as to automate such chores as logging in to remote
- systems.
-
- PibTerm's script language is a programming language
- specifically geared towards communications activities. In
- this introductory guide we will only discuss a few of the
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 92 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 92
-
-
- features of scripts; for complete details on the full
- programming language, see the "PibTerm Script Language
- Reference Guide."
-
- As a simple example, let's look at the script VAX.SCR
- supplied as part of the PibTerm release materials. VAX.SCR
- is designed to be attached to the dialing entries for the
- ACNS Vax 785. VAX.SCR provides automatic login to the Vax
- after a successful phone connection between your PC and the
- Vax has been negotiated.
-
- Here is the text of the script:
-
- ****************************************************************
- * *
- * VAX.SCR --- Login script for ACNS Vax 785 *
- * *
- * Replace the userid and password with your username *
- * and password where noted below. *
- * *
- ****************************************************************
- *
- * Send CRs to wake up Vax.
- * Wait for "Username" prompt.
- Repeat
- SText "|"
- WaitString "Username:" 2
- Until ( WaitFound )
- * Send username -- replace with yours
- SText "username|"
- * Wait for "Password" prompt
- WaitString "Password:"
- * Send password -- replace with yours
- SText "userpass|"
- * Set input keys
- Key "decvax.fnc"
-
-
- First of all, note that lines beginning with a '*' are
- comment lines.
-
- Second, note that most of the script lines are either the
- SText command or the WaitString command. These are the two SText WaitString
- most heavily used commands in scripts.
-
-
- SText -- send text to remote system SText -- send text to remote system
-
- SText sends text to the remote system. The text to be sent SText
- is placed in double quotes. If you want to send a double
- quote, then you need to repeat it twice to get it sent. For
- example, to send
-
- My text is "this"
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 93 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 93
-
-
-
- you would write
-
- SText "My text is ""this"""
-
- Note that a vertical bar "|" terminates the SText. This is
- the character which represents a carriage return.
-
-
- WaitString -- wait for text from remote system WaitString -- wait for text from remote system
-
- WaitString causes PibTerm to pause in the execution of the WaitString
- script until the specified string arrives from the remote
- system. The text to be waited for is placed in double
- quotes. By default, PibTerm will wait 30 seconds for the
- text to appear before continuing script execution with the
- next statement after the WaitString. You can alter the wait
- time by specifying a different time in seconds following the
- the string to be waited for. For example,
-
- WaitString "Username:" 2
-
- causes PibTerm to wait two seconds for the string
- "Username:" to appear.
-
- If the string specified on the WaitString arrives within the
- specified amount of time, an internal PibTerm flag called
- the WaitFound flag is set true, otherwise it is set false. WaitFound
- This flag allows us to instruct PibTerm to do different
- things depending upon whether or not the wait string
- appeared. In the case of our Vax script, we use the
- WaitFound to control a Repeat/Until loop.
-
-
- Repeat/Until loop Repeat/Until loop
-
- It takes a variable number of carriage returns to wake up
- the Vax after dialing in. We need to place the sending of a
- carriage return and the waiting for "Username:" in a loop so
- that we can issue as many carriage returns as necessary to
- wake up the Vax. This is the purpose of the initial
- Repeat/Until loop. Repeat/Until
-
- Statements in a Repeat/Until loop are executed until the
- condition specified on the Until statement becomes true. In
- this case, we've specified that the loop should continue
- until the WaitFound flag is set true. As indicated above, WaitFound
- the WaitFound flag will only be set true when the
- "Username:" text arrives from the remote system. Each time
- through the Repeat/Until loop we send a carriage return;
- wait two seconds for "Username:" to appear; and if it does,
- we continue with the SText following the Until. If the
- "Username:" text does NOT appear within two seconds, then we
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 94 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 94
-
-
- loop again, sending another carriage return, waiting for
- "Username:" for another two seconds, and so on.
-
- The Key command loads the function keys for the Vax. Key
-
- PibTerm's script language can get much more complicated than
- this, but for many purposes all you'll need are the
- WaitString, SText, and Repeat/Until (WaitFound) constructs.
-
-
- Executing a script Executing a script
-
- To execute a script, hit <ALT>G to bring up the script menu.
- If you remember the name of the script, just type it when
- prompted. If you don't remember it, or you're using a
- mouse, just hit Enter (or the right mouse button) to bring
- up the display of available scripts. You can use the arrow
- keys or mouse to move among the script names. Hit the enter
- key (or the right mouse button) to select the highlighted
- script name for execution.
-
- You may find it convenient to place all your scripts in one
- subdirectory. You can tell PibTerm the name of that
- subdirectory at
-
- <ALT>P,
- P)aths,
- f) Script directory.
-
-
- Terminating script execution -- <ALT>X Terminating script execution -- <ALT>X
-
- You may want to stop the execution of a script before it
- completes. To do this, hit <ALT>X. This is the same
- command as is used to exit PibTerm when no script is
- executing.
-
-
- Security considerations with login scripts Security considerations with login scripts
-
- The sample scripts for logging into the various ACNS systems
- include script commands for sending your account password.
- If other individuals have access to your PC, and you do not
- want them to know your passwords, you should alter the
- scripts to remove the passwords. This means that you will
- need to manually intervene during the course of the login.
-
- For example, in the VAX.SCR script above, you could remove
- the final SText "password|" and enter the password manually. SText "password|"
-
- If you are an avid BBS fan, you may want to use the same
- basic login script to access a number of different systems,
- each running the same remote bulletin board software. For
- example, you can write a "generic" PC Board login script for
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 95 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 95
-
-
- accessing all the PC Board systems you normally call.
- However, your password is probably different for each of the
- PC Board systems. You may want to construct a file which
- provides the passwords for each of the remote systems, and
- then write the generic PC Board login script to extract the
- correct password for a particular system automatically from
- the password file. You can do this using scripts, and the
- "PibTerm Script Reference Manual" contains an example.
-
- Keeping a password file is not a good idea if your PC is
- accessible by other individuals who should not know your
- passwords.
-
-
- Script learn feature Script learn feature
-
- You don't need to know how to program to create simple
- scripts with PibTerm because of the script learn feature. script learn
- PibTerm can write a script for you by watching a session and
- keeping track of what you type and what the remote system
- sends. The resulting learned script usually needs a little
- manual touching-up.
-
- As an example, let's consider the problem of logging in to
- the ACNS Vax. What we hope to get is something similar to
- the script VAX.SCR which we just looked at.
-
-
- We start by initiating a "learn script" session. To do
- this, type <ALT>G. This is the primary command for
- executing a script. If we were going to execute a script,
- we would enter its name at this time in response to the
- prompt. The resulting display looks like this:
-
- ╒[ Execute Script ]═════════════════════════════════════════════════╕
- │Script name (hit ENTER for menu, ESC to quit) │
- │> │
- │ │
- │ │
- │ │
- │ │
- │ │
- │ │
- │ │
- ╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- Since we aren't executing a script, we hit the Enter key to
- bring up the main script menu, which might appear as
- follows:
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 96 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 96
-
-
- ╒[ Script Directory ]══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╕
- │ EMULATE IOTRY KERMIT KERMIT2 PIBTERM &PIBTERM RECKERM │
- │ RECMLINK RECRLINK RECYTERM RECZMOD SENDKERM SENDMLIN SENDRLIN │
- │ SENDYTER SENDZMOD SUB1 SUB2 SUB3 TRYMENU TRYPARMS │
- │ TRYPROCS TRYSETS │
- │ │
- │ │
- │ │
- │ │
- │ │
- │ │
- │ │
- │ │
- │ * before script name means script resides in PIBTERM.SCL │
- │ & before script name means script already compiled to memory │
- │ │
- │ESC Quit / Scroll PgUp/PdDn Page Home/End Top/bottom │
- │S Search C Compile U Unload L Learn │
- │ENTER execute A Unload all O Change search order (now DL) │
- │ │
- ╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
-
- The names of any currently defined menus are displayed at
- the top of this window. The various script facilities are
- displayed at the bottom of the screen. We type "L" which
- begins a script learn session. After typing "L" the
- following box appears:
-
- ╒[ Script Directory ]══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╕
- │ EMULATE IOTRY KERMIT KERMIT2 PIBTERM &PIBTERM RECKERM │
- │ RECMLINK RECRLINK RECYTERM RECZMOD SENDKERM SENDMLIN SENDRLIN │
- │ SENDYTER SENDZMOD SUB1 SUB2 SUB3 TRYMENU TRYPARMS │
- │ TRYPROCS TRYSETS │
- │ │
- │ ╒[ Learn Script ]═══════════════════════════════════════════════════╕ │
- │ │Script name (hit ENTER for menu, ESC to quit) │ │
- │ │>vaxit │ │ vaxit
- │ │Enter maximum length for each WAITSTRING: 15 │ │ 15
- │ │Enter maximum lines kept for WAITSTRING: 1 │ │ 1
- │ │ │ │
- │ │ │ │
- │ * befor│ │ │
- │ & befor│ │ │
- │ │ │ │
- │ESC Q╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛ │
- │S Search C Compile U Unload L Learn │
- │ENTER execute A Unload all O Change search order (now DL) │
- │ │
- ╘══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
-
- We'll call our learned script VAXIT.SCR. We'll assume a
- maximum wait string length of 15 characters (usually more
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 97 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 97
-
-
- than enough), and we'll only wait on the last line (again,
- usually that's enough).
-
- After entering the above information, PibTerm returns to
- terminal emulation mode. The status line shows the name of
- the script being learned preceded by a "-".
-
- We dial the Vax system, and wait for the modems to connect.
- When the connection is complete, we begin hitting the Enter
- key slowly. Eventually the Vax responds with a "Username:"
- prompt. We enter our username. The Vax then prompts for a
- password. We enter our password. The Vax then proceeds to
- log us in.
-
- After the login is complete, hit <ALT>G again. This
- terminates the script learn operation.
-
- The resulting script in VAXIT.SCR will look something like
- this:
-
- SText "|"
- SText "|"
- SText "|"
- SText "|"
- WaitString "Username: "
- SText "username|"
- WaitString "Password: "
- SText "userpass|"
- WaitString "Center if you h"
- SText "|"
-
- You can see from this that it took four tries to wake up the
- Vax after the connection was complete. Whenever you see
- something like this series of carriage returns, you normally
- replace it with the kind of Repeat/Until loop described
- earlier. The last few lines aren't important for the login,
- so we evict them.
-
- With those minor changes, you can see that the learned
- script is very close to the VAX.SCR script we looked at
- earlier.
-
-
- Script Memory Problems Script Memory Problems
-
- When you request script execution, PibTerm converts the
- script to a series of coded instructions which are then
- stored in RAM memory. The script can then be executed as
- many times as you like from the "compiled" copy stored in
- memory -- scripts are not unloaded from memory automatically
- when they finish executing. If there isn't enough RAM
- memory to store the new script, you'll receive an error
- message.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 98 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 98
-
-
- If you run out of memory while trying to execute a script,
- you may be able to reclaim some space allocated to other
- unused scripts. Bring up the <ALT>G box, hit Enter or Enter
- Return to get the primary script menu display, and then look Return
- for script names preceded by an &. These are scripts which &.
- are currently loaded into memory. Move the cursor to those
- memory-resident scripts which you no longer need, and hit U U
- to unload them.
-
- You can also unload all the currently memory-resident
- scripts by hitting A at the script menu. A
-
-
- Another Sample Script -- Dialing By Name Another Sample Script -- Dialing By Name
-
- As mentioned previously in the section "Dialing By Name",
- PibTerm does not provide a direct means of dialing a system
- by name. However, we can write a script which prompts for
- the name of the system and then dials that system. We will
- name the script NAMEDIAL.SCR. NAMEDIAL.SCR
-
- The text of the NAMEDIAL script follows. NAMEDIAL displays
- a number of advanced PibTerm script language features. If
- you are familiar with programming in an algorithmic
- language, then you will probably be able to understand the
- script commands with no difficulty.
-
- **************************************************************************
- * *
- * This script demonstrates how to write a "dial by name" command. *
- * You can attach this script to a definable key using <ALT>K *
- * by entering this as the definition of that key: *
- * *
- * @G@/NAMEDIAL^M/ *
- * *
- * This allows you to dial systems by name rather than entry number *
- * simply hitting the defined key. *
- * *
- **************************************************************************
- *
- * Holds name of system to dial
- Declare Name String
- * Holds one directory entry
- Declare DirEnt String
- * Number of dialing directory entries
- Declare NEntries Integer
- * Number of dialing directory entries (string)
- Declare SEntries String
- * Current entry number
- Declare IEntry Integer
- * Flag telling if we find emtry
- Declare Found Integer
- * Issue prompt for name of system to dial
- * and read name.
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 99 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 99
-
-
- *
- Writeln " "
- Input "System to dial? " Name
- Writeln " "
- *
- * If name is null, exit this script.
- *
- If ( LENGTH( Name ) = 0 ) Then
- Exit
- Endif
- * Convert name to upper case
- Set Name = UpperCase( Name )
- * Get number of dialing directory entries
- GetParam 'DS' SEntries
- * Convert from string to integer for looping
- Set NEntries = Number( SEntries )
- * Make sure we have some entries, else quit.
- *
- If ( NEntries < 1 ) Then
- Exit
- Endif
- * Found = 0 means no entry found yet.
- Set Found = 0
- * IEntry starts out pointing to first
- * entry in dialing directory.
- Set IEntry = 1
- * Scan dialing entries and look for match.
- *
- Repeat
- * --- Get next dialing entry using
- * "DialEntry" function.
- *
- * Strip off stuff after name/number using
- * the "Substr" function and convert the
- * name/number to uppercase using the
- * "UpperCase" function.
- *
- Set DirEnt = UpperCase( Substr( DialEntry( IEntry ), 1, 40 ) )
- *
- * --- Search for the desired name using the
- * "Index" function. If the search string
- * is found in the current entry, then
- * set Found to 1 so that the search loop
- * will terminate. If the name isn't found
- * in the current entry, then increment
- * "IEntry" to point to the next dialing
- * directory entry.
- *
- If ( Index( Name , DirEnt ) > 0 ) Then
- Set Found = 1
- Else
- Set IEntry = IEntry + 1
- Endif
- *
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 100 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 100
-
-
- Until ( ( Found = 1 ) OR ( IEntry > NEntries ) )
- *
- * If entry not found, issue message and
- * exit script.
- *
- If ( Found = 0 ) THEN
- Writeln "Name not found."
- Writeln " "
- Exit
- Endif
- * If entry found, dial it. Note that
- * dialing command wants the entry number
- * as a string, so we must convert it to
- * a string for use with the dialing command.
- *
- * Note that you can do fancier processing
- * at this point, like adding prefix/postfix
- * codes, or checking for long distance
- * area codes, and so on. Just modify the
- * value of Name to match your requirements.
- Set Name = STRING( IEntry )
- *
- Dial Name
- *
-
- This script issues a prompt requesting the name of the
- system to be dialed (Input). Then a search is made through Input
- the dialing directory for a match in the name or phone
- number fields (Repeat/Until). Note that the search is not Repeat/Until
- sensitive to case (UpperCase). UpperCase
-
- If a successful match is encountered, then the matched
- system is dialed (Dial). Any script attached to that number Dial
- is executed. If no system matches the specified name, then
- the message "Name not found" is displayed and no dialing is
- performed.
-
- For example, suppose we strike the End key. We will see the End
- prompt:
-
- System to dial?
-
- If we enter Luis in response to this prompt: Luis
-
- System to dial? Luis Luis
-
- then the dialing directory entry for the Luis system will be
- found, and the Luis system itself dialed using the
- information in that dialing directory entry.
-
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 101 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 101
-
-
- Access To The Operating System -- <ALT>J Access To The Operating System -- <ALT>J
-
- <ALT>J causes PibTerm to invoke DOS, the PC's operating
- system. If the invocation succeeds, then you may enter DOS
- or other commands to your heart's content. Entering EXIT as
- a DOS command returns you to PibTerm. Note that PibTerm
- stays loaded during this process, so you have much less
- memory to run programs in than you would without PibTerm
- running. This means that you may not be able to run another
- large program like Lotus 123 or WordPerfect from within
- PibTerm. However, you may be able to circumvent this by
- using a multitasker or by causing PibTerm to execute out of
- expanded (LIM/EMS/EEMS) memory. See the sections "PibTerm
- and multitasking software" and "Speeding up PibTerm access"
- for more information.
-
- Before jumping to DOS, PibTerm changes the cursor shape from
- an underline to a square box. This reminds you that you
- jumped to DOS from PibTerm. Upon return to PibTerm (after
- you type EXIT) the cursor is set back to an underline.
- PibTerm also restores the screen image to what it was before
- DOS was invoked.
-
- You should not jump to DOS in the middle of receiving
- characters from a remote system, as some characters may be
- lost.
-
- A couple of things can cause trouble with <ALT>J. Running
- another program which commandeers the same communications
- port that PibTerm is using may cause trouble, as
- may executing a program which in turn calls up yet another
- copy of the DOS command processor. You may need to reboot
- if your system locks up in either of these cases. The worst
- offenders are Basic programs, which nearly always reset the
- serial ports even if they don't actually use them. This
- means that you will not be able to send and/or receive
- characters over the serial port after a DOS jump.
-
- You can often solve the problem of a program resetting the
- serial port by requesting that PibTerm close down the serial
- port before the DOS jump and then reopen it again after
- returning from the DOS jump. Normally PibTerm leaves the
- serial port open so that any incoming characters received
- during the DOS jump -- up to the size of the serial port
- input buffer -- will not be lost. To request that Pibterm
- close the port before the DOS jump and then reopen it
- afterwards, set the parameter at
-
- <ALT>P,
- C)ommunications,
- m) Close serial port on jump to DOS
-
- to YES.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 102 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 102
-
-
-
- Manipulating DOS Files From PibTerm -- <ALT>F Manipulating DOS Files From PibTerm -- <ALT>F
-
- Pressing <ALT>F causes PibTerm to display a menu of
- file manipulation facilities. The menu displayed is:
-
-
- ╒[ Choose file function: ]═╕
- │ A)ctive directory change │
- │ C)opy file │
- │ D)irectory display │
- │ E)dit file │
- │ F)ree space on drive │
- │ L)ogged drive change │
- │ P)rint a file │
- │ V)iew a file │
- │ Z)ap (delete) file │
- │ Q)uit │
- ╘═══════════════════════════╛
-
- You can use these file manipulation facilities as an
- alternative to jumping to DOS using <ALT>J. The menu
- entries are fairly self-explanatory for each item.
-
- A)ctive directory change alters the current logged A)ctive directory change
- directory and/or drive.
-
- C)opy file copies a file byte-by-byte. C)opy file
-
- D)irectory display lists file names, sizes, creation D)irectory display
- times and dates, attributes, and transfer times.
- Wildcards are allowed as part of the directory
- specification.
-
- E)dit file either invokes the built-in PibTerm full- E)dit file
- screen editor, or an external editor of your choice.
- See the section "Editing a file" for more details.
-
- F)ree space on drive displays the number of bytes of F)ree space on drive
- free (unused) space on a selected disk drive.
-
- L)ogged drive change alters the current logged drive. L)ogged drive change
-
- P)rint a file starts printing a file. Printing P)rint a file
- proceeds in tandem with other PibTerm operations.
-
- V)iew a file invokes the built-in PibTerm file viewer, V)iew a file
- or the external file viewer of your choice. See the
- section"Viewing a file" for more details.
-
- Z)ap a file deletes a file from a disk. Z)ap a file
-
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 103 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 103
-
-
- Editing a file Editing a file
-
- E)dit file prompts you for the name of a file to be edited.
- This may be the name of an existing file or the name of a
- new file. The menu prompting you for the name of the file
- looks like this:
-
-
- ╒[Edit File]════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╕
- │Enter name of file to edit: │
- │>PIBTERM.CNF │ PIBTERM.CNF
- │ │
- ╘═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- We've entered the name of the primary PibTerm configuration
- file as the file to be edited. The resulting display might
- look something like this:
-
- Line 1 Col 1 Ins Indent c:\modem\pibterm.cnf
- FC=|
- FD=~
- FW=`
- FM=^
- FS=@
- AB=1
- AC=0
- AD=0
- AE=^M
- AF=0
- AK=1
- AL=0
- AM=1
- AP=0
- AS=255
- AT=0
- AU=COM
- AW=1
- AX=0
- AZ=1
- BA=9600
- BB=8192
- BC=╒═╕│╛═╘│
- 1Help 2Undo 3Find 4Replace 5SaveQuit 6InsLine 7DelLine 8Startblk 9Endblk 0Quit
-
- The top line gives the name of the file being edited, the
- current line and column positions within the file, whether
- insert or overwrite mode is in effect (Ins), and whether
- automatic indentation is in effect (Indent).
-
- The bottom line indicates what pressing the function keys
- will do. For example, pressing F1 will display help. F1
- Pressing F2 will undo changes to the current line being F2
- edited, and so on.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 104 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 104
-
-
- Editing keys work for the most part like the string editing
- elsewhere in PibTerm, except that the PgUp and PgDn keys PgUp PgDn
- page one screenful up and down through the file,
- respectively. There are other differences as well. See the
- command list below for details.
-
- Two editing commands you should know right away: pressing
- F5 leaves the editor after saving the current text, while F5
- pressing F10 leaves the editor but does NOT save the current F10
- text.
-
-
- Maximum size file which can be edited Maximum size file which can be edited
-
- Only files with all lines less than 255 characters in length
- can be edited. The largest file size that can be edited is
- the minimum of the available heap space (hit <ALT>Y to find
- out the available heap space) and 65520 characters.
-
- This editor is based upon one written by Sammy Mitchell, the
- author of the excellent QEdit shareware editor. If you are
- looking for a good general-purpose text editor that can
- handle multiple files simultaneously, as well as larger
- files than the PibTerm editor can handle, then QEdit is a
- good choice. You can register QEdit or obtain more
- information about it by writing to:
-
- SemWare
- c/o Sammy Mitchell
- 730 Elk Cove Court
- Kennesaw, GA 30144
-
- Registration for QEdit is $30; for $45 you also get a
- printed manual.
-
-
- Editing Commands Editing Commands
-
- A list of the editing commands and key strokes follows. If
- you have previously used any WordStar-like editor, then the
- commands implemented in the PibTerm file editor will be
- quite familiar.
-
- Cursor Movement Cursor Movement
-
- The cursor movement commands allow you to move about the
- screen, and also to move about in the file.
-
- Character left ^S Left arrow
- Character right ^D Right arrow
- Word left ^A Ctrl left arrow
- Word right ^F Ctrl right arrow
- Line up ^E Up arrow
- Line down ^X Down arrow
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 105 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 105
-
-
- Scroll up ^W
- Scroll down ^Z
- Page up ^R PgUp
- Page down ^C PgDn
- Left end of line ^Q^S Home
- Right end of line ^Q^D End
- Top of file ^Q^R Ctrl PgUp
- Bottom of file ^Q^C Ctrl PgDn
- End of screen ^Q^X Ctrl Home
- Top of screen ^Q^E Ctrl End
- Start of marked block ^Q^B
- End of marked block ^Q^K
- Previous position ^Q^P
-
- Insert and Delete Insert and Delete
-
- The insert and delete commands allow you to insert or delete
- characters or lines of text.
-
- Insert mode on/off ^V Ins
- Insert line ^N F6
- Delete line ^Y F7
- Delete to end of line ^Q^Y
- Delete right word ^T
- Delete char at cursor ^G
- Delete left char ^H <BS>
-
- Block Commands Block Commands
-
- The block commands allow you to manipulate a range of lines
- as a unit. You can read, write, copy, move, delete, or
- insert blocks of text.
-
- Mark block start ^K^B F8
- Mark block end ^K^K F9
- Mark single word ^K^T
- Hide/show block ^K^H
- Copy block ^K^C
- Move block ^K^V
- Delete block ^K^Y
- Read block from file ^K^R
- Write block to file ^K^W
-
- Search and Replace Search and Replace
-
- These commands allow you to search for a string and
- optionally replace that string with another.
-
- Find ^Q^F F3
- Find and replace ^Q^A F4
- Repeat last find ^L
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 106 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 106
-
-
- Quitting the Editor Quitting the Editor
-
- These commands allow you to leave the editor.
-
- End edit (save file) ^K^D F5
- Quit edit (no save) ^K^X F10
-
- Miscellaneous Miscellaneous
-
- Here are some miscellaneous editing commands.
-
- Tab ^I Tab
- Auto tab on/off ^Q^I
- Restore line (undo) ^Q^L F2
- Control char prefix ^P
- Help F1
-
-
- Invoking an External Editor Invoking an External Editor
-
- Rather than use the built-in PibTerm editor you may prefer
- to use another one with which you are more familiar. You
- can do by using leaving Pibterm using <ALT>X and returning
- to DOS to execute the editor. This can be inconvenient,
- since you then need to start up PibTerm again. You can use
- the <ALT>J command to jump to DOS so that you can execute
- the editor from within PibTerm. This is more convenient,
- but you still have to drop to DOS and call up the editor
- yourself.
-
- As an alternative, PibTerm can invoke the external editor of
- your choice for you automatically when you request file
- editing at
-
- <ALT>F,
- E)dit file
-
- You must provide PibTerm the name of the editor to be
- executed at:
-
- <ALT>P,
- P)aths,
- a) Editor file name
-
- Place the complete control statement required to invoke the
- editor. Some editors require that the name of the file to
- be edited appear on the editor control statement. You can
- tell PibTerm to place the file name in the control statement
- by using '%F' to indicate where the file name goes. %F
-
- For example, if you want to invoke QEdit with a file name,
- then define the editor name parameter as:
-
- QEDIT %F
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 107 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 107
-
-
-
- If you need more flexibility than this, you can define the
- editor name to point to a batch file (.BAT) which can then
- execute any additional control statements as required.
-
-
- Viewing a file Viewing a file
-
- V)iew a file lets you list the contents of an Ascii file.
- You can request that a non-Ascii file be displayed, but the
- resulting display is generally useless.
-
- PibTerm presents you with a menu requesting the name of the
- file to be viewed. In this case, we request the viewing of
- the PIBTERM.CNF file:
-
-
- ╒[ View A File ]══════════════════════════════════════════════════════╕
- │ │
- │Enter name of file to list: │
- │>PIBTERM.CNF │ PIBTERM.CNF
- │ │
- ╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- This is what the initial view of the file looks like:
-
-
- File: PIBTERM.CNF Size: 1388 Date: 88/01/09 Time: 02:56:46
- FC=|
- FD=~
- FW=`
- FM=^
- FS=@
- AB=1
- AC=0
- AD=1
- AE=^M
- AF=1
- AK=1
- AL=0
- AM=1
- AP=
- AS=255
- AT=0
- AU=COM
- AW=1
- AX=0
- AZ=0
- BA=2400
- BB=8192
- BC=╒═╕│╛═╘│
- Line 23 Column 1 ////PgUp/PgDn/Home/End/S/N/<ESC>
-
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 108 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 108
-
-
-
- The top line of the display provides the name of the file
- being viewed, the size of the file in bytes, and the date
- and time of the file's creation.
-
- The last line provides the current line number of the last
- line on the screen and the first column displayed.
-
- You can use the up and down arrow keys to move up and down
- one line in the file. The left and right arrow keys allow
- you to scroll the screen horizontally one character at a
- time to view files which are more than 80 columns wide. You
- can use the PgUp and PgDn keys to toggle up and down a PgUp PgDn
- screenful of lines at a time through the file. Hitting the
- Home key takes you to the top of the file, and hitting the Home
- End key takes you to the end of the file. End
-
- Hitting S allows you to search (in a case-insensitive S
- manner) for a string in the file. Hitting N allows you to N
- jump to a specific line number in the file.
-
- Press the ESC key to stop listing the file. ESC
-
-
- Invoking an External File Viewer Invoking an External File Viewer
-
- As with the editor, you can request that an external file
- viewer be invoked when <ALT>F, V)iew a file is selected.
- Define the name of the program (which can be a batch file)
- at:
-
- <ALT>P,
- P)aths,
- b) File browser name
-
- You can use '%F' to indicate where in the control statement %F
- PibTerm should insert the name of the file when invoking the
- external file viewer.
-
- An excellent choice for an external file viewer is Vern
- Buerg's shareware LIST.COM program. LIST is available from LIST.COM
- nearly any bulletin board system. To define LIST.COM as the
- external viewer, enter
-
- LIST %F
-
- as the viewer path parameter value above.
-
- Vern Buerg requests a donation of $15 if you use LIST. You
- can send your donation to:
-
- Vern Buerg
- 456 Lakeshire
- Daly City, CA 94015
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 109 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 109
-
-
-
-
- Defining Function Keys -- <ALT>K Defining Function Keys -- <ALT>K
-
- <ALT>K allows you to define strings to be sent to the host
- system whenever any one of the function keys (F1 through
- F12, Shift F1 through Shift F12, Alt F1 through Alt F12, and
- Ctrl F1 through Ctrl F12), or anyone of the keypad keys
- (Home, Ins, Del, PgUp, PgDn, End, arrow keys, and Ctrl and
- Alt version of those keys) is depressed. Strings up of to
- 65 characters can be assigned to the keys. This facility
- provides great flexibility in creating logon scripts,
- special command sequences for host systems, and terminal
- keypad values.
-
- NOTE: If you wish a specific set of key definitions to NOTE: If you wish a specific set of key definitions to
- be automatically loaded whenever you invoke be automatically loaded whenever you invoke
- PibTerm then place the definitions in the file PibTerm then place the definitions in the file
- PIBTERM.FNC. PIBTERM.FNC.
-
- When you hit <ALT>K, you will see a menu with the
- following entries:
-
- ╒[ Function key definition: ]══════╕
- │ D)isplay current definitions │
- │ E)nter definitions from keyboard │
- │ R)ead definitions from file │
- │ W)rite definitions to file │
- │ Q)uit key definition │
- ╘═══════════════════════════════════╛
-
-
- Displaying current key definitions Displaying current key definitions
-
- D)isplay current definitions allows you to see the current
- key definitions.
-
- Not all defined keys may be usable on a given PC keyboard.
- For example, you cannot type F11 and F12 on a keyboard which
- does not have those keys, but you can still assign string
- definitions to those keys anyway. You CAN send those
- definitions in scripts (see the "PibTerm Script Language
- Reference Manual" for details).
-
-
- Reading key definitions from a file Reading key definitions from a file
-
- R)ead definitions from file causes PibTerm to ask you for
- the name of a file containing key definitions. You need only
- enter the first part of the file name; the suffix .FNC is
- assumed. For example, if you enter "MYKEYS" as the file
- name, that is the same as entering "MYKEYS.FNC." However,
- entering "MYKEYS." causes PibTerm to look for the file
- "MYKEYS" WITHOUT the .FNC suffix. Of course, you can enter
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 110 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 110
-
-
- the full file name if you wish: MYKEYS.FNC, or even a name
- like MYKEYS.DAT.
-
- When PibTerm is initially invoked, the file PIBTERM.FNC, if
- it exists, is read in order to set the default function key
- values. You may enter key definitions at the keyboard as
- described in the next section and then write the resulting
- definitions to PIBTERM.FNC so that those definitions will
- automatically exist when PibTerm is executed.
-
-
- Entering key definitions at keyboard Entering key definitions at keyboard
-
- E)nter definitions from keyboard is used to set the
- key definitions by hand. You can use E)nter to look at
- keys you've already defined, or to create a file to be used
- in a later session.
-
- After you hit E)nter you will see this menu display:
-
- ╒[ Input key definition ]═════════════════════════════════════════════╕
- │ Hit key to define or <ESC> to quit: │
- │ │
- │ │
- │ │
- ╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- To define a key, strike it. If the key cannot be defined,
- then you will receive the following message:
-
- ╒[ Input key definition ]═════════════════════════════════════════════╕
- │ Hit key to define or <ESC> to quit: │
- │ *** Not a valid key │
- │ │
- │ │
- ╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- If you strike a key which CAN be defined -- for example, the
- HOME key on the IBM keypad -- then you will receive this
- message:
-
- ╒[ Input key definition ]═════════════════════════════════════════════╕
- │ Hit key to define or <ESC> to quit: Kpd 7 Home │
- │ --> │
- │ │
- │ │
- ╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- You may now enter the text which you want assigned to the
- Home key. From this point on, hitting the Home key will Home Home
- cause PibTerm to transmit the assigned text to the remote
- system.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 111 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 111
-
-
- If the Home key had already been defined, then the text of Home
- that definition would have appeared for you to edit in the
- box above.
-
-
- Requesting extended keypad handling Requesting extended keypad handling
-
- Normally PibTerm uses the standard system facilities for
- reading the keyboard. Unfortunately, some useful key
- combinations are "thrown away" by the system so that
- PibTerm never sees them.
-
- For example, the <ALT>End key combination is thrown away by <ALT>End
- the system and therefore PibTerm doesn't recognize that key
- combination if you press it.
-
- In order to gain access to a number of the keyboard key
- combinations which can theoretically be defined at <ALT>K,
- PibTerm needs to "take over" a part of the system keyboard
- reading routine. In technical terms, PibTerm commandeers
- interrupt $9. By doing this, PibTerm is able to recognize
- many more key combinations (especially on the older 83/84-
- key keyboards).
-
- You can instruct PibTerm to take over keyboard input by
- setting the parameter at:
-
- <ALT>P,
- I)input,
- e) Recognize extended keypad
-
- to YES.
-
- This setting may NOT work on all systems, and may NOT work
- under some multitaskers. You will need to experiment. The
- easiest way to see if this option works on your system is to
- set it to YES and then try to define one of the <ALT>keypad
- keys like <ALT>End or <ALT>PgDn using "E)nter definitions <ALT>End <ALT>PgDn
- from keyboard" above. If PibTerm recognizes the key, then
- the extended keypad option works. If it does not, or your
- system locks up, then you won't be able to use the extended
- keypad keys.
-
- Since this option makes various <ALT>keypad combinations
- work, you will need to hold down BOTH the <ALT> and <SHIFT>
- keys together with a keypad key if you wish to use the
- standard DOS facility for generating special characters
- using the keypad.
-
-
- Writing key definitions to a file Writing key definitions to a file
-
- W)rite definitions to file causes the current key
- definitions to be written out. These can be read later
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 112 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 112
-
-
- using R)ead. Again, you need only enter the first part of
- the file name; the suffix .FNC is automatically added if
- none appears in the file name you specify.
-
-
- Quitting key definition mode Quitting key definition mode
-
- Q)uit leaves key definition mode and returns to terminal
- emulation mode.
-
-
- Contents of key definition strings Contents of key definition strings
-
- The actual key definitions are comprised of ordinary Ascii
- text. There are five special characters defined for use with
- the input key facility:
-
- 1. A character to represent a carriage return -- the
- default is '|' (ascii 124).
-
- 2. A character to cause a one-second delay -- the
- default is '~' (ascii 126).
-
- 3. A character to cause PibTerm to wait for the
- immediately following character to be sent by the
- remote system before sending any more of the
- function key string. The default is '`' (ascii
- 96).
-
- 4. A character to mark the immediately following
- character as a control character. The default is
- '^' (ascii 94). For example, entering '^G' in a
- string (the ascii characters 94, 71) results in a
- single character being entered in the string,
- ascii 7 -- the bell character, control-G.
-
- 5. A character to mark the following character(s) as
- either PibTerm commands or text to be considered
- the same as a keyboard entry. The default is '@'.
-
- If the character following the @ is a letter, then
- the corresponding <ALT>letter PibTerm command is
- executed. Upper and lower case letters are
- treated the same. For example, if the string
- entered is @R then the receive file facility is
- invoked, just as if you entered <ALT>R at the
- keyboard.
-
- If the letter following the @ is NOT a letter,
- then that character is considered a delimeter, and
- all characters in the string up until the next
- occurrence of that delimeter -- or the end of the
- string -- are stuffed into PibTerm's keyboard
- buffer. PibTerm will then act just as if these
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 113 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 113
-
-
- characters had been entered from the actual
- keyboard.
-
- 6. If you want to literally use one of the special
- characters @, |, ^, ~, or ` in a function key
- definition, then you need to enter the following
- special character sequences instead of the
- character itself:
-
- To get, use:
-
- @ ^'@
- | ^'|
- ^ ^'^
- ~ ^'~
- ` ^'`
-
-
- Intercharacter Delays in Function Key Definitions Intercharacter Delays in Function Key Definitions
-
- Normally when you depress a function key the contents of the
- string assigned to that key are transmitted to the remote
- system at full speed. Some systems -- particularly those
- with front-end protocol converters -- may not be able to
- process incoming escape sequences at full speed. In that
- case you may want to tell PibTerm to insert a slight delay
- after each character of the string is sent to the remote
- system. To set an intercharacter delay, go to
-
- <ALT>P,
- I)nput,
- i) Function key intercharacter delay
-
- By default, PibTerm sets an intercharacter delay of ten
- milliseconds, which appears to work well with many systems.
-
-
- Attaching PibTerm commands to function keys Attaching PibTerm commands to function keys
-
- The '@' character allows you to attach quite complicated
- sequences of PibTerm commands to function keys. The
- definitions of PgUp and PgDn in the ACNS-supplied function
- key definition files (DECVAX.FNC, etc.) are examples. PgUp
- initiates a Kermit send, and PgDn initiates a Kermit get.
- Here are the definitions of PgUp and PgDn as given in PgUp PgDn
- DECVAX.FNC:
-
- PgUp: K9=@S@/db/ PgUp
- PgDn: K3=@R@/db/ PgDn
-
- @S indicates the <ALT> key command <ALT>S for sending a @S
- file, and @R indicates the <ALT> key command for receiving a @R
- file. @/db/ indicates that the literal characters "d" @/db/
- followed by "b" should be read as if they had been typed in
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 114 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 114
-
-
- by hand. The "d" selects Kermit from the <ALT>R or <ALT>S
- menu of file transfer protocols, and "b" selects get binary
- file or send binary file, depending upon whether an <ALT>R
- or <ALT>S has been requested.
-
-
- Attaching a Script to a Function Key Attaching a Script to a Function Key
-
- Another use for key definition is to attach a script to a
- function key. For example, suppose that we want to execute
- the HARDWIRE.SCR script for selecting a system to access HARDWIRE.SCR
- from a hard-wired terminal, every time the Home keypad key Home
- is hit. Then the string to assign using
-
- <ALT>K,
- E)nter definitions from keyboard
-
- would be:
-
- @G@/HARDWIRE^M/
-
- Here the @G acts as if we hit the <ALT>G key to bring up the @G
- script processor. @/HARDWIRE^M/ provides the name of the @/HARDWIRE^M/
- script to be executed and also places a carriage return
- (Ascii ^M) in the keyboard buffer after the name.
-
- From this point on, when Home is struck, the HARDWIRE.SCR Home
- script will be invoked.
-
- As another example, let's attach the script to dial a system
- by name presented in the previous section "Another Script
- Example: Dialing A System By Name." The script name is
- NAMEDIAL.SCR. Choose a key to attach this script to -- say,
- the End key on the keypad -- and hit End
-
- <ALT>K,
- E)nter definitions from keyboard
-
- Hit the End key when prompted for the key to define. Enter End
- the definition for NAMEDIAL.SCR as:
-
- @G@/NAMEDIAL^M/
-
- From that point on, if you want to dial a system by name,
- just hit the End key. End
-
-
- Setting a function key subdirectory Setting a function key subdirectory
-
- You may find it convenient to set up a separate subdirectory
- to contain all of your key definition files (*.FNC). You
- can do that at
-
- <ALT>P,
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 115 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 115
-
-
- P)aths,
- g) Function key directory
-
- After defining a function key subdirectory, PibTerm will
- always look there for a function key file if you do provide
- an explicit path when reading or writing a function key file
- at <ALT>K.
-
-
- Session Logging Session Logging
-
- PibTerm provides several different mechanisms for recording
- your session. The session may be written to a printer or
- captured to a disk file, and useful auxilliary information
- can also be collected.
-
-
- Logging session to printer -- <ALT>L Logging session to printer -- <ALT>L
-
-
- <ALT>L toggles the logging of your session to the
- printer. Initially printer logging is turned off. If you
- hit <ALT>L, PibTerm starts recording your session to the
- printer. If you hit <ALT>L again, then printer logging
- stops.
-
- MAKE SURE YOUR PRINTER IS TURNED ON BEFORE HITTING <ALT>L MAKE SURE YOUR PRINTER IS TURNED ON BEFORE HITTING <ALT>L
- OR YOUR SYSTEM MAY LOCK UP. PibTerm writes to the DOS OR YOUR SYSTEM MAY LOCK UP.
- device PRN:. PibTerm tries to prevent lock ups if the
- printer is off-line or out of paper, but the methods used do
- not work for all systems.
-
- You can define a printer setup string which PibTerm will
- send the printer right after it initializes the modem at
- program start-up time. To enter the string, press
-
- <ALT>P,
- O)dds and ends,
- a) Printer setup string
-
- If this string is empty (which it is by default), nothing is
- sent to the printer at startup time.
-
-
- Capture session to disk -- <ALT>O Capture session to disk -- <ALT>O
-
- Alternatively, you can use the <ALT>O command to capture a
- session to disk and print it or process it later on as you
- desire.
-
- <ALT>O toggles the capture of the current session to
- disk. This works like <ALT>L, except that instead of
- sending the session to the printer, the session is sent to a
- disk file. PibTerm prompts you for the name of the disk
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 116 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 116
-
-
- file. If it exists, the captured session is appended to the
- end of the file.
-
- PibTerm asks you if you want an edited or an unedited
- capture. The edited capture saves the edited screen image of
- each line (up to 132 characters) rather than the
- unedited character stream from the remote system. Edited
- captures are convenient when you are typing during a capture
- session; the resulting file will show only your edited
- input. An unedited capture will contain all the backspaces,
- deletes, and other editing characters, and may be quite
- unreadable as a result.
-
- You can activate printer logging and capture file
- logging together.
-
- Intermixed with the output received from the remote
- system will be PibTerm-supplied information lines. These
- lines all begin with '>>'. The content of these lines
- indicate conditions like carrier drop, success/failure of a
- file transfer, what system has been dialed, and so on. Each
- line has a time/date stamp.
-
- For example, you might see the following information line in
- your capture file when the carrier drops:
-
- >> 87/09/15 18:47:15 Carrier dropped.
-
-
- Activating PIBTERM.LOG file Activating PIBTERM.LOG file
-
- You may want to keep a file which contains nothing but
- the information lines described above. You can do that by
- turning on "log file logging" at
-
- <ALT>P,
- O)dds and ends,
- p) Perform logging to log file.
-
- The log file is PIBTERM.LOG. Again, you can have log file
- logging active simultaneously with capture file logging and
- printer logging.
-
- Log file logging is always active in host mode.
-
-
- Screen Dumps Using <ALT>U Screen Dumps Using <ALT>U
-
- <ALT>U writes the text of the currently displayed screen
- image to the file SCRNDUMP.DAT. Only the text on the
- screen is written to the file, not the attributes (like
- color, or blink). You can only perform a screen dump when
- you are in terminal mode, NOT when you are already at
- another menu or in host mode. You can use <ALT>U repeatedly,
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 117 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 117
-
-
- and each screen is appended to the current contents of
- SCRNDUMP.DAT.
-
- In Tektronix 4010 emulation mode, a 16K (for CGA) or 28K
- (for EGA) bit-map of the screen image is written to the file
- GSCRNDUM.DAT. This file can be manipulated by programming
- languages, but it cannot be listed as SCRNDUMP.DAT can
- because GSCRNDUM.DAT is not a text file.
-
-
- Scanning the Review Buffer -- <ALT>V Scanning the Review Buffer -- <ALT>V
-
- PibTerm saves the text of lines previously displayed on the
- screen in a review buffer. A maximum of 254 characters is
- saved from each line --- extra characters are thrown away.
- The number of lines saved is determined by the length of the
- saved lines and the size of the review buffer. You can set
- the size of the review buffer at
-
- <ALT>P,
- V)ideo mode and colors,
- l) Review buffer size
-
- The buffer size is specified in characters (NOT lines). If
- you set the buffer size to zero, then the review buffer will
- not be active. The maximum review buffer size is 32767
- characters.
-
- You can display the saved lines by hitting <ALT>V. The
- result will be a split-screen display in which the top part
- of the screen acts as a window over the review buffer, and
- the bottom of the screen lists the available commands
- and the current line numbers and column numbers being
- viewed.
-
- The PC keypad keys control viewing. Use the up and down
- arrows to scroll up and down one line at a time through
- the saved lines. The left and right arrows take you ten
- columns left or right respectively in the 132 column
- display. PgUp and PgDn take you up and down a page of 19 PgUp PgDn
- lines, respectively. Home takes you to the first page, and Home
- End takes you to the last page. ESC exits the view mode. W End ESC W
- writes the review buffer to disk, and S allows you to search S
- the review buffer for a specified string. You can also use
- the mouse to scroll through the review buffer.
-
- The review buffer does NOT take account of escape sequences,
- so the resulting saved display for a full-screen session may
- not be very intelligible. Also, the first line in the
- review buffer may be truncated in the front. This is because
- the review buffer will chop the front of the first saved
- line in order to store the last (most recent) line if
- necessary.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 118 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 118
-
-
-
- Mute Mode -- <ALT>M Mute Mode -- <ALT>M
-
- Remote systems frequently send Ascii BEL characters which
- cause PibTerm to issue beeping sounds. Also, PibTerm itself
- may issue various sound effects in cases of errors. If you
- are using your PC in an environment where those sounds are
- disturbing to others, or you yourself don't like them, you
- may prefer to toggle mute mode on by hitting <ALT>M. This mute mode <ALT>M.
- prevents PibTerm from issuing any beeps.
-
- In some cases, PibTerm will display a flashing <ALERT> on <ALERT>
- the last line of the screen instead of issuing beeps when
- mute mode is turned on.
-
- The ANSI/BBS terminal emulation mode allows specially
- encoded musical notation to be "played" by your PC. You may
- find this disconcerting, especially in the middle of the
- night. If mute mode is set, then any music commands
- received by PibTerm are IGNORED.
-
- Also, you can disable the gossip feature in host mode by
- setting mute mode. You must do this BEFORE invoking host
- mode using <ALT>W.
-
-
- Translate Table -- <ALT>T Translate Table -- <ALT>T
-
- PibTerm provides a facility for translating incoming
- characters into other characters. You can use this facility
- to strip out certain characters by indicating that you want
- the incoming character to be translated to the Ascii NUL
- character (Ascii 0). By default, incoming characters are
- left untranslated. To define a translation table, hit
- <ALT>T.
-
- If the file PIBTERM.TRA exists in your default PibTerm
- directory, then the translate table contained in that file
- is read in automatically when PibTerm starts up.
-
-
- Editing A Line On The Screen -- <ALT>A Editing A Line On The Screen -- <ALT>A
-
- When <ALT>A is pressed, a highlighted bar appears at line 1
- if the cursor is currently on lines 2 through 25 (or
- whatever the bottom line on the screen is). The highlighted
- bar appears on the bottom line if the cursor is on line 1.
- You may then use the keypad arrow keys to move around the
- screen to any displayed line and edit that line using the
- keypad keys listed below. Pressing the INS key toggles INS
- insertion mode (the default) and overwrite mode. A carriage
- return causes the text of all altered lines to be sent to
- the remote system, and <ALT>A mode is exited.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 119 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 119
-
-
- In addition to the arrow keys, ^X moves down a line and ^E
- moves up a line on the screen. ^K is used to mark the
- beginning and end of a line range to be concatenated for
- editing purposes (maximum 255 characters in the joined
- text). Horizontal scrolling will be used if necessary when
- the concatenated text exceeds the available display width.
-
- <ALT>A provides a simple block-mode feature for use with
- remote hosts that do not have full-screen features. Since
- the editors for all the ACNS mainframe systems are full-
- screen editors, <ALT>A isn't especially useful for them.
- However, one good use for <ALT>A is to correct an improperly
- entered system command for those systems without an edit-
- last-command feature.
-
-
- Displaying Session Timers -- <ALT>Y Displaying Session Timers -- <ALT>Y
-
- <ALT>Y invokes the display of session timers:
-
- ╒[ Display session information ]══════════════════════════════════════╕
- │Current host system : ------------------------- │
- │Current phone number: # ### ###-#### │
- │ │
- │Elapsed time since PibTerm started : 00:01:07 │
- │Elapsed time since current session began: 00:01:07 │
- │Available heap space in bytes: 69664 │
- │ │
- │Current time: 02:40:34 │
- │Current date: 1987/10/29 │
- │ │
- │Current capture file name: *** None *** │
- │Current script name : *** None *** │
- │ │
- │Enter C to clear dialing session timer, hit ESC to continue ... │
- │ │
- │ │
- │ │
- ╘═════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╛
-
- If you are in the midst of a dialing session then the
- "Current host system" and "Current phone number" will tell
- you what system you're connected to.
-
- The "Elapsed time since PibTerm began" tells you how long
- you've been in PibTerm. The "Elapsed time since current
- session began" tells you how long you've been connected to
- the current system. (This will be the same as "Elapsed time
- since PibTerm began" before you dial any remote systems.)
- You may want to clear the session timer value to zero
- manually when you begin a hard-wired session; to do that,
- enter "C" as prompted.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 120 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 120
-
-
- The "Available heap space in bytes" shows you how much space
- PibTerm has available for loading scripts, file buffers, and
- so on. If this number drops under 16000 bytes (32000 when
- an EGA graphics card is installed) then you may not be able
- to run Tektronix 4010 emulation. If this number drops under
- 8000 then you may have trouble executing new scripts or
- performing file transfers.
-
- The "Current time" and "Current date" are obvious. "Current
- capture file name" tells you the name of the current capture
- file opened by <ALT>O. "Current script name" tells you the
- name of the currently executing script from <ALT>G.
-
-
- Finding An Area Code -- <ALT>Z Finding An Area Code -- <ALT>Z
-
- <ALT>Z invokes PibTerm's built-in dialing area directory.
- You can enter a dialing code, a state, or a country and
- receive the corresponding state, country, or dialing codes.
- For domestic area codes, you also receive a list of
- representative cities and towns in that area.
-
- The dialing code data is kept on the file PIBTERM.ACO. That PIBTERM.ACO
- file must be present in order for <ALT>Z to work.
-
-
- PibTerm Program Parameters PibTerm Program Parameters
-
- PibTerm allows several parameter specifications on the
- program invocation statement. Each parameter name is a
- single letter and is preceded by a slash and followed by an
- equal sign and the parameter value:
-
- /c Name of configuration file to use (default is PIBTERM.CNF)
- /d Name of dialing directory (default is PIBTERM.FON)
- /e Dialing prefix file (default is PIBTERM.PRE)
- /k Function key file (default is PIBTERM.FNC)
- /l Log file name (default is PIBTERM.LOG)
- /p Serial port number (overrides port listed in PIBTERM.CNF)
- /s Script name to be executed upon entry to PibTerm
- (default is PIBTERM.SCR)
- /t Translate file name (no translation by default)
- /x Use expanded memory (LIM/EMS/EEMS) for PibTerm overlays
- if available. (No '=' is needed after '/x')
-
- Example:
-
- PIBTERM /c=PIBCOM2.CNF /s=HOSTIT.SCR /x
-
- Here the configuration file PIBCOM2.CNF is used rather than
- PIBTERM.CNF, and HOSTIT.SCR is executed immediately after
- the configuration files are read. Overlays are loaded into
- (and executed from) expanded memory if it is available.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 121 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 121
-
-
-
- Speeding Up PibTerm Access Speeding Up PibTerm Access
-
- PibTerm is a fairly large program, and it can be slow in
- swapping its various program segments in and out of memory.
- One way to speed up PibTerm processing is to place
- PIBTERM.EXE and PIBTERM.OVR files on a RAM disk, if you have
- enough memory.
-
- Another way to speed up PibTerm if you have a large amount
- of expanded memory installed is to tell PibTerm to execute
- out of that expanded memory. To do that, include the "/x"
- switch when you invoke PibTerm:
-
- PIBTERM /x PIBTERM /x
-
- Expanded memory is provided by a number of add-in boards
- like the Intel Aboveboard or the AST RamPage. Note that
- this must be EXPANDED memory, not EXTENDED memory (consult
- the documentation for your add-in memory board for the
- details).
-
-
- It takes several seconds to read a large dialing directory
- file (PIBTERM.FON), and it also takes time to write it out
- again with any revisions at the end of the PibTerm session.
- One way to reduce the read/write time for the phone
- directory is to use an editor to remove unused directory
- lines (usually from the end of the directory). The built-in
- PibTerm editor is fine for this, assuming you have enough
- memory.
-
- For example, if you are only using 10 numbers out of the 200
- you normally get with PibTerm, then edit the dialing
- directory and remove the last 190 entries.
-
- If you use the built-in PibTerm editor to do this, make sure
- you don't place any calls using the directory during that
- editing session. If you do, then PibTerm will write out a
- revised directory that will ignore the changes you made
- manually using the editor.
-
-
- Changing Colors in PibTerm Changing Colors in PibTerm
-
- PibTerm is distributed with all the colors set to black and
- white. This avoids problems stemming from different types
- of display adapters -- all adapters can display black and
- white. (Of course, if you have an amber screen, then black
- and white are displayed as black and amber; if you have a
- green screen, then black and white are displayed as black
- and green; and so on.)
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 122 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 122
-
-
- However, PibTerm does allow you to set a variety of colors
- for menus and terminal emulation mode. You can set the
- various color parameters at
-
- <ALT>P,
- V)ideo mode and colors.
-
-
- VT100 emulation has its own set of colors which differ from
- those used for other emulations. There is a separate menu
- item for setting VT100 colors under
-
- <ALT>P,
- V)ideo mode and colors,
- i) VT100 colors.
-
- Setting the parameters for the colors is straightforward.
- However, if you are already in VT100 mode, then you will not
- see any change in the colors displayed after selecting new
- VT100 colors until you perform a terminal reset. That is,
- after changing the terminal emulation colors, always hit
- <Shift>Tab to reset the terminal so that the new colors take <Shift>Tab
- effect.
-
-
- Changing Screen Display Size On EGA/VGA Adapters Changing Screen Display Size On EGA/VGA Adapters
-
- Normally PibTerm runs in 80 column, 25 line mode. Line 25
- is usually used as a status line.
-
- If you have an EGA or VGA, you can change the number of
- lines displayed. On an EGA you can select 25, 35, 43, and
- 50 line modes. On a VGA you can select 25, 50, and 60 line
- modes.
-
- You can set the number of lines PibTerm should use in the
- display at:
-
- <ALT>P,
- V)ideo mode and colors,
- o) Maximum physical screen length
-
- If you have an ATI EGA Wonder or ATI VIP VGA then you can
- also set the number of columns to 132. You can do that at:
-
- <ALT>P,
- V)ideo mode and colors,
- p) Maximum physical screen width
-
- Note that PibTerm will automatically switch between 80
- column mode and 132 column mode in VT100 emulation if you
- have one of the ATI display cards and you have set the
- parameter
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 123 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 123
-
-
- <ALT>P,
- V)ideo mode and colors,
- r) ATI EGA Wonder/ ATI VIP VGA installed
-
- to YES.
-
-
- Command Line Mode Command Line Mode
-
- You can enter script commands directly from the keyboard.
- This allows you to use PibTerm in a command-driven fashion
- if you dislike the menus. To do this you need to define a
- key which will invoke command mode. This is done at the
-
- <ALT>P,
- O)dds and ends,
- b) command key definition submenu.
-
- You will be asked to hit the key which will be subsequently
- used to invoke command mode. This key must be one of the
- legal function keys, keypad keys, or Alt-number keys which
- are also available for definition by <Alt>K. Don't choose a Don't choose a
- key which is already defined as a terminal keypad key! key which is already defined as a terminal keypad key!
-
- There is NO DEFAULT value for the command line key, i.e., NO DEFAULT value
- PibTerm does not provide command line mode by default. not
-
- Hitting the command key causes the status line of the
- display to show 'Command: '. You may then enter a script
- command which will be immediately executed.
-
- For example, you might enter the script command
-
- Dial "1"
-
- to dial the first number in the dialing directory, or
-
- SetParam "pa" "N"
-
- to set no parity.
-
- If the command is incorrectly entered, an error message is
- printed on the status line.
-
- You may add your own user-defined commands. See the
- description of the AddCommand script command in the AddCommand
- "PibTerm Script Language Reference Manual."
-
-
- Script commands allowed in command line mode Script commands allowed in command line mode
-
- The following subset of script commands can be used sensibly
- in command line mode:
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 124 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 124
-
-
- Addlf Alarm Break Capture ChDir
- Clear ComDrain ComFlush CopyFile Delay
- Dial Dos Echo EditFile EraseFile
- Execute Exit ExitAll FreeSpace GetDir
- GetParam Hangup Host Input Key
- KeyDef KeyFlush KeySend Log Message
- Mute Param PrintFile Quit Receive
- Redial RInput ScreenDump Send
- SetParam SText Suspend Text Translate
- ViewFile Wait WaitCount WaitList WaitQuiet
- WaitString WaitTime When WhenDrop
- WriteLog
-
- Some of the other commands may be accepted, but they aren't
- useful in command line mode. Some of the commands (like IF,
- REPEAT, etc.) will NOT be accepted at all.
-
- For a description of these commands, see the "PibTerm Script
- Language Reference Manual."
-
- And of course, any user-defined commands you specify can be
- executed in command-line mode as well.
-
-
- PibTerm And Multitasking Software PibTerm And Multitasking Software
-
- There are a number of commercially available programs which
- extend standard MS DOS to provide multitasking, allowing you
- to run more than one program simultaneously. This is quite
- useful with a program like PibTerm: you can be connected to
- a remote system and be performing a long file transfer,
- while at the same time you can be (for example) editing a
- document using a word processor or compiling a program with
- Turbo Pascal.
-
- PibTerm may not run with all multitasking software. It DOES
- run well with the following multitaskers:
-
- DoubleDos (from SoftLogic)
- DesqView (from QuarterDeck)
- TaskView (from Sunny Hill Software)
- TopView (from IBM)
-
- PibTerm recognizes that one of these multitaskers is active
- and Pibterm adjusts itself automatically to improve
- performance in the multitasking environment.
-
- Since Microsoft Windows understands TopView emulation,
- PibTerm will run in a window under MS Windows. However, the
- performance of PibTerm under Windows is generally poor.
-
- Note that some features of PibTerm may not work correctly
- under multitaskers (e.g., Tektronix 4010 mode or 132 column
- mode using the ATI EGA Wonder card). You will need to
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 125 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 125
-
-
- experiment to find out what does and what does not work for
- a particular multitasker.
-
- The file PIBTERM.DVP, included as part of the PibTerm PIBTERM.DVP
- release materials, is a program definition file for PibTerm
- for use with DesqView. Recent versions of TaskView will
- also read this file. For earlier versions of TaskView, you
- can look at TASKVIEW.NOT in the release materials, which TASKVIEW.NOT
- shows what settings you should use to run PibTerm under
- TaskView.
-
- Any other multitasker which recognizes TopView calls should
- also work properly with PibTerm. If it does not, or the
- multitasker does not recognize TopView calls, then you may
- be able to get PibTerm to work with it by turning off direct
- screen writing. To do this, press
-
- <ALT>P,
- V)ideo mode and colors,
- j) Write directly to video memory
-
- If "Write directly" is NO, then standard BIOS calls are used
- for all screen output. This slows down PibTerm screen
- output considerably, but it should make PibTerm compatible
- with almost any multitasker.
-
-
- Programs Which Conflict With PibTerm Programs Which Conflict With PibTerm
-
- There are some programs which don't like PibTerm and vice
- versa. The worst offenders are any programs which alter the
- CPU timer or which spend a lot of time masking out other
- interrupts. The major culprits are print spooling programs,
- on-screen time display programs, and keyboard enhancers.
- If you find that PibTerm is working erratically -- PibTerm
- drops characters when you are printing a file, or when you
- have a timer display up -- then you should disable programs
- like those mentioned above when running PibTerm. PibTerm
- provides a special pseudo-spooler print mode which you can
- access at
-
- <ALT>F
- P)rint a file
-
- to help make up for one of the offenders, and the <ALT>Y
- command provides elapsed time to help make up for the other.
- Most of the terminal emulation modes also feature an
- optional status line which does have a constantly updated
- hour:minutes time-of-day display.
-
- You may also find that Pibterm doesn't like your favorite
- keyboard enhancer. Since PibTerm allows you to define a
- plethora of keys, you may be able to avoid having the
- keyboard enhancer active if your only need is to send simple
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 126 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 126
-
-
- pre-defined strings to remote systems. See the section on
- "Defining Function Keys" for more details.
-
- If you are a Sysop and try to run PibTerm in the same
- machine in which you have your BBS software loaded, you may
- find that one of the resident drivers for your BBS conflicts
- with PibTerm. For example, some OPUS BBS drivers interfere
- with the proper reception and transmission of characters in
- PibTerm. You may need to remove those drivers from your
- CONFIG.SYS file or AUTOEXEC.BAT file before running PibTerm
- to avoid problems.
-
-
- General Trouble-Shooting Hints General Trouble-Shooting Hints
-
- PibTerm defaults to a Hayes compatible modem setup, and
- PibTerm works best with a Hayes compatible modem. If your
- modem isn't Hayes compatible, then you'll have to change the
- PibTerm parameters related to dialing. WE STRONGLY ADVISE WE STRONGLY ADVISE
- YOU TO PURCHASE ONLY HAYES COMPATIBLE MODEMS FOR USE WITH YOU TO PURCHASE ONLY HAYES COMPATIBLE MODEMS FOR USE WITH
- PIBTERM. The Hayes "AT" command set is the industry PIBTERM.
- standard.
-
- This section presents a variety of common problems that
- surface when using PibTerm, and the solutions to those
- problems. Also see the sections on "File Transfer Trouble
- Shooting", "Dialing problems", and "Programs which conflict
- with PibTerm."
-
- Problem: After requesting PibTerm to start executing, the Problem:
- PC hangs while PibTerm is trying to read its
- configuration files.
-
- What to do: What to do:
-
- This usually indicates too little memory to
- execute PibTerm. Run the DOS command CHKDSK to CHKDSK
- see how much memory you actually have installed in
- your PC. If you don't have at least 280K
- AVAILABLE for use by PibTerm, then PibTerm won't
- run correctly. This means that you need AT LEAST
- 320K of memory installed in your machine.
-
- Generally PibTerm will report that it may not have
- enough memory to execute before it fails.
-
- Another possibility is that you've indicated the
- wrong type of monitor. If you have a monochrome
- adapter and monitor MAKE SURE that the parameter
- at
-
- <ALT>P,
- V)ideo mode and colors,
- k) Wait for retrace
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 127 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 127
-
-
-
- is set to NO. If you're caught in a Catch-22
- because you can't enter PibTerm to change this
- parameter, then you can use a text editor which
- produces PLAIN ASCII files to alter PIBTERM.CNF. PLAIN ASCII
- Change the line
-
- WR=1
- to
- WR=0
-
- in PIBTERM.CNF. While you're at it, change the
- TM= parameter to read
-
- TM=M
-
- which indicates a monochrome display.
-
- Problem: PibTerm starts, but then the screen fills with Problem:
- multi-colored junk, or menus do not disappear when
- then should.
-
- What to do: What to do:
-
- This also indicates insufficient RAM memory to run
- PibTerm.
-
- Problem: When I execute PibTerm, I get a message like Problem:
- "Overlay file not available."
-
- What to do: What to do:
-
- a) Check that you correctly copied the PIBTERM.OVR
- file to your PibTerm subdirectory. If you used
- the ACNS INSTALL program, then PIBTERM.OVR should
- be correctly installed.
-
- b) Make sure that your DOS PATH= includes the drive
- name and subdirectory name in which the
- PIBTERM.OVR file resides.
-
- Problem: PibTerm appears to execute correctly, but nothing Problem:
- is sent out my modem -- no modem lights flicker,
- no dialing commands appear to have any effect,
- etc.
-
- What to do: What to do:
-
- a) If you are using a modem, make sure your modem is
- turned on. If it is an internal modem, make sure
- that it is correctly installed and firmly seated
- in a compatible expansion slot.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 128 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 128
-
-
- If you are running a hard-wired line, you may need
- to send some special sequence to the remote system
- in order to "wake it up." A common method is to
- issue a break (<ALT>B).
-
- b) Make sure that the serial cable is plugged into a
- serial port outlet on your PC (on some machines
- it's easy to confuse a parallel port outlet or
- graphics display adapter outlet with a serial port
- outlet). Also ensure that the serial cable is
- correctly plugged into the modem.
-
- c) Make sure that your cable is the correct type for
- your modem or hardwired connection. You may need
- to insert a null modem for some hard-wired
- connections. Also check if your modem has a
- switch specifying whether pins 2 and 3 are to be
- switched or not -- that switch may be set
- incorrectly. Refer to the documentation for your
- modem for further details.
-
- d) Make sure that the serial port itself is properly
- installed. If the serial port is located on an
- add-in board, or you are using an internal modem,
- you may need to set switches or jumpers to
- activate the serial port/modem correctly and to
- prevent conflicts with other serial port(s) which
- may already be present in your system. Refer to
- the documentation for the add-in board or modem
- for details.
-
- e) Make sure that you have specified the correct port
- in the PIBTERM.CNF file. The PO= parameter
- indicates the port. If your serial port is at a
- non-standard address you may need to set the IRQ
- level and port address. You can set the correct
- port at
-
- <ALT>P,
- C)ommunications,
- a) Serial port.
-
- If you are unable to run PibTerm at all because of
- an incorrect port setting, you can use the "/p"
- command line option of PibTerm to override the
- port number specified in the PIBTERM.CNF file.
-
- You can also change the port using the ACNS-
- supplied CONFIG program, or by using a text-editor
- to directly change the PIBTERM.CNF file. Make Make
- sure your text editor produces ordinary Ascii text sure your text editor produces ordinary Ascii text
- files, NOT word-processor files. files, NOT word-processor files.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 129 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 129
-
-
- f) Make sure that you have correctly set the dialing
- parameters for either a touch-tone or a rotary-
- dial line. See the section on "Problems with
- Dialing" for more details.
-
- Problem: The Jump to DOS feature (<ALT>J) doesn't work. Problem:
-
- What to do: What to do:
-
- a) Make sure that you have enough memory to run the
- Jump to DOS. You should have at least 35K of free
- space. You can check this by hitting <ALT>Y and
- checking the available heap space. If that value
- isn't at least 35000, the Jump to DOS will
- probably fail.
-
- b) Make sure that you have a copy of COMMAND.COM
- along the current DOS PATH=. Alternatively, place
- a copy of COMMAND.COM in the same directory as the
- PibTerm files, pointed to by the SET PIBTERM=
- variable you should have set according to the
- instructions displayed by the PibTerm INSTALL
- program. If you are not at Northwestern, then see
- Appendix A for instructions on setting the DOS
- PATH= for use with PibTerm.
-
- Also see the section "Access to the Operating
- System: <ALT>J" for other problem solutions.
-
- Problem: Communications proceed, but VERY slowly. Problem:
-
- You may experience extremely slow communications,
- where it appears that only one character is being
- sent out by PibTerm every five or six seconds, but
- INCOMING characters are received correctly.
-
- What to do: What to do:
-
- Either your modem, serial port, or modem cable
- isn't transmitting the Clear-To-Send or Data-
- Set_Ready signals. You can tell PibTerm to ignore
- those signals at
-
- <ALT>P,
- C)ommunications,
- h) Check clear to send
- i) Check data set ready
-
- Try setting "Check clear to send" to NO first. If
- that doesn't help, try setting "Check data set
- ready" to NO as well.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 130 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 130
-
-
- Problem: Screen display "snows" badly. Problem:
-
- You may find that the screen display "snows" badly
- every time PibTerm writes anything on the screen.
- This means that multicolor splotches appear and
- the screen flickers in a very disconcerting
- manner. This "snow" stems from a design flaw in
- the original IBM color graphics adapter (CGA) and
- some other graphics cards which seek to emulate
- the IBM CGA.
-
- What to do: What to do:
-
- Tell PibTerm to slow down screen writing by
- writing characters to the screen only during
- "safe" periods when snow won't occur. To do
- this, press
-
- <ALT>P,
- V)ideo mode and colors,
- k) Wait for retrace
-
- This should eliminate most or all of the snow.
-
- The standard IBM color graphics adapter (CGA)
- blinks the screen every time the screen is
- scrolled up. You can circumvent this by
- requesting that PibTerm perform the scrolling in
- an alternate manner that eliminates flicker, but
- which slows down the rate of scrolling
- considerably. Press
-
- <ALT>P,
- V)ideo mode and colors,
- q) Use software scrolling
-
- Problem: Many characters dropped in screen display. Problem:
-
- You may find that some characters are correctly
- displayed, but many more are simply dropped from
- the display and don't appear at all.
-
- What to do: What to do:
-
-
- There are many possible reasons for dropped
- characters.
-
- a) You are running a program which conflicts
- with PibTerm in some way (see the section
- above on "Programs which conflict with
- PibTerm").
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 131 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 131
-
-
- b) You are running at too high a baud rate for
- your PC to keep up with the remote system.
- Try using a lower baud rate.
-
- c) Your serial port or cable is damaged. Try
- replacing your cable, then try another serial
- port in your machine if you have one.
-
- d) Your modem is bad, or your phone line is bad.
- Try another modem if you can, and try calling
- the remote system again. Try another phone
- line if you have access to one.
-
- e) Your display adapter turns off interrupts for
- too long a time, causing the serial port to
- drop incoming characters. Try setting
- PibTerm for direct screen writes with NO wait
- for retrace at
-
- <ALT>P,
- V)ideo mode and colors,
- j) Write directly
- k) Wait for retrace
-
- Also, turn off the status display during file
- transfers by hitting <SHIFT><TAB> after the
- transfer starts.
-
-
- Saving changed parameters Saving changed parameters
-
- Any parameter changes you make can be saved by pressing
-
- <ALT>P,
- W)rite config file
-
- This means you only need to reset the parameters once and
- then you can save your changes for the next time.
-
-
- A Final Word From The Author A Final Word From The Author
-
- PibTerm has gone through many changes over the past four
- years. Nearly all of the changes and improvements have been
- implemented in response to the suggestions of PibTerm users.
-
- I'd like to thank collectively all of you who have
- contributed so many excellent ideas to the development of
- PibTerm: PibTerm program users, especially the Northwestern
- University community; Sysops whose patience with my using
- their systems to communicate with my testers seemed
- inexhaustible; and PibTerm program testers, without whom
- PibTerm would probably never have run correctly on anything!
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 132 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 at Northwestern Page 132
-
-
- Thank-you one and all!
-
- -- Phil "Pib" Burns
- February, 1988
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- Appendix A -- Installing PibTerm Appendix A -- Installing PibTerm
-
- ACNS provides Northwestern University users of PibTerm with
- special customized installation programs for PibTerm called
- INSTALL.COM and CONFIG.COM. These programs are located on INSTALL.COM CONFIG.COM
- Disk A of the Northwestern University release set. These
- installation programs are NOT PROVIDED in the general
- PibTerm release for the rest of the universe. If you are at
- Northwestern University, but you received your copies of
- PibTerm elsewhere, contact the Information Center in
- Academic Computing about getting a proper ACNS PibTerm
- release set.
-
- This appendix discusses the installation of PibTerm for
- those individuals who are not at Northwestern University and
- therefore did not receive the special INSTALL and CONFIG
- programs. The most difficult part of using PibTerm is
- getting it installed in the first place!
-
- You need a system with AT LEAST 300K of AVAILABLE RAM memory AT LEAST 300K of AVAILABLE RAM memory
- (on top of the operating system and resident programs) to
- run PibTerm. You also need at least two 360K diskette
- drives, or a single drive with 720K or more space available,
- or (preferably) a hard disk. While it is POSSIBLE to run
- PibTerm on a single 360K floppy system, we don't recommend
- it.
-
- After you get the PibTerm files, make sure to create a
- backup copy of the files on whatever medium is most
- convenient for you.
-
- Most of the time, if you get PibTerm on diskettes, you will
- find a copy of a dearchiving program like Vern Buerg's ARCE
- or Phil Katz's PKXARC has also been placed on each diskette.
- The installation instruction below assume that this is the
- case.
-
-
- Hard Disk Installation Hard Disk Installation
-
- This section describes the installation of PibTerm on a hard
- drive. However, these same instructions can be used to
- install PibTerm on a high capacity floppy drive (1.2
- megabytes or greater).
-
- (1) Create a subdirectory on your hard drive to hold
- PibTerm. If you already have an old version of PibTerm
- you should back up the old version and then erase the
- old executables from your hard drive:
-
- ERASE PIBTERM.COM
- ERASE PT4*.CHN
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Appendix A Page 134 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Appendix A Page 134
-
-
- ERASE PIBTERM.0*
-
- Leave copies of your current PibTerm configuration
- files in the directory. These include PIBTERM.CNF,
- PIBTERM.PRE, PIBTERM.FON, and so on.
-
- For example, if your hard drive is drive C: you could
- create a subdirectory PIBTERM as follows:
-
- MKDIR C:\PIBTERM
- CD \PIBTERM
-
- You should move to the PibTerm directory before
- extracting the files in step 2 below.
-
- (2) Extract the files in PIBT41E1.ARC and PIBT41E2.ARC to
- the PibTerm subdirectory. Use your favorite de-
- archiver. For example, if drive A: contains the
- PIBT41E1.ARC file, and you have the ARCE.COM program
- installed on your hard drive, then you could extract
- the files as follows:
-
- ARCE A:PIBT41E1
-
- Likewise, extract the files from PIBT41E2.ARC:
-
- ARCE A:PIBT4E2
-
- You should now have the following files (among others)
- in the PibTerm subdirectory:
-
- PIBTERM.EXE Main executable program
- PIBTERM.OVR Program overlays
- PIBCOLOR.CNF Color configuration file
- PIBMONO.CNF Mono configuration file
- PIBBW.CNF Black and white configuration file
- CNFUPDAT.EXE Config file updater
-
- CNFUPDAT.EXE updates pre-v4.1 PibTerm configuration
- files to v4.1 specifications.
-
- (3) If you already have existing configuration files from
- an earlier version of PibTerm:
-
- Execute the program CNFUPDAT.EXE which will
- convert your PIBTERM.CNF file from earlier
- versions of PibTerm to that required for v4.1.
- For example,
-
- CNFUPDAT PIBTERM
-
- will convert your old PIBTERM.CNF file to the new
- format. (The old file will be renamed PIBTERM.CNO
- in case you want to keep a copy of it around.)
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Appendix A Page 135 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Appendix A Page 135
-
-
-
- If you don't already have existing PibTerm
- configuration files:
-
- If you have a color graphics adapter and color
- monitor, rename PIBCOLOR.CNF to PIBTERM.CNF.
-
- If you have a monochrome adapter and monitor,
- rename PIBMONO.CNF to PIBTERM.CNF.
-
- If you have a color graphics adapter and a
- monochrome monitor, rename PIBBW.CNF to
- PIBTERM.CNF.
-
- PibTerm will create the remaining parameter files when
- you execute it the first time.
-
- (4) Make sure that your CONFIG.SYS file specifies AT LEAST
- the following minimum FILES= and BUFFERS= sizes:
-
- FILES=20
- BUFFERS=30
-
- If you don't have an existing CONFIG.SYS file, then
- copy the file CONFIG.PIB provided as part of the ACNS
- release materials to the root directory of your boot
- disk, and rename it CONFIG.SYS.
-
- (5) If you have an existing AUTOEXEC.BAT file, add the
- following statement to it:
-
- SET PIBTERM=C:\PIBTERM
-
- where the directory name you enter is that in which you
- installed PibTerm.
-
- If you do not have an existing AUTOEXEC.BAT file, then
- copy the file AUTOEXEC.PIB provided as part of the
- PibTerm release materials to the root directory of your
- boot disk, and rename it AUTOEXEC.BAT.
-
-
- (6) If you already have a PATH statement in your
- AUTOEXEC.BAT file, add the PibTerm path to it. For
- example, if your path statement looks like this:
-
- PATH C:;C:\DOS
-
- then append the PibTerm subdirectory like this:
-
- PATH C:;C:\DOS;C:\PIBTERM
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Appendix A Page 136 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Appendix A Page 136
-
-
- If you used the supplied AUTOEXEC.PIB file (after
- renaming it to AUTOEXEC.BAT), then you may need to
- modify the PATH statement therein to match your system.
-
-
- (7) You should now reboot so that the various CONFIG.SYS
- and AUTOEXEC.BAT file changes take effect.
-
- (8) To execute PibTerm, just type
-
- PIBTERM
-
- If you have around 300K of available expanded memory in
- your system, you can type
-
- PIBTERM /x
-
- and PibTerm will load its overlays into EMS or EEMS at
- program starup time, and then load them from there
- during the remainder of execution. This is much faster
- than loading the overlays from disk. (However, even the
- disk-resident v4.1 overlays will load much more quickly
- than the previous v4.0.x .CHN-style overlays.)
-
-
- Single-floppy (>360K) system Single-floppy (>360K) system
-
- (1) Format a new diskette (we'll call it the PibTerm Master
- Diskette) with the operating system on it using the DOS
- FORMAT command:
-
- FORMAT A: /S
-
- (2) Copy the file PIBT41E2.ARC onto the PibTerm Master
- Diskette using the DOS COPY command:
-
- COPY B:PIBT41E2.ARC A: /V
-
- DOS prompts you to enter the diskette with PIBT41E2.ARC
- on it as drive B:. DOS then asks you to swap diskettes
- as needed until the copy is finished.
-
- If the diskette with the PIBT41E1.ARC file on it also
- contains a dearchiver, then make sure you copy the
- dearchiver to the PibTerm Master Diskette as well. For
- example, assuming that Vern Buerg's program ARCE is
- provided with the PibTerm archives:
-
- COPY B:ARCE.COM A: /V
-
- If the the diskette from which you copied PIBT41E1.ARC
- doesn't have a dearchiver on it, then make sure you
- have another floppy handy that DOES have the dearchiver
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Appendix A Page 137 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Appendix A Page 137
-
-
- on it, and then copy the dearchiver from the other
- diskette onto the PibTerm Master Diskette.
-
- (3) Extract the contents of PIBT41E2.ARC onto the PibTerm
- Master Diskette using the dearchiving program. For
- example, using ARCE.COM:
-
- A:
- ARCE PIBT41E2
-
- After the extraction completes, erase PIBT41E2.ARC from
- the PibTerm Master Diskette.
-
- (4) Repeat steps 2 and 3 above, except this time with the
- diskette containing the PIBT41E1.ARC file.
-
- You will now have all the required PibTerm files loaded
- onto the PibTerm Master Diskette.
-
- (4) Rename the file CONFIG.PIB to CONFIG.SYS. You may need
- to edit CONFIG.SYS in case you have any extra device
- drivers or special RAM boards in your system.
-
- (5) If you already have existing configuration files from
- an earlier version of PibTerm, then proceed as follows:
-
- Copy the old configuration files onto the PibTerm
- Master Diskette at this time. For example, if
- you've previously backed up your old PibTerm
- configuration files to another diskette, then copy
- these files from your backup diskette to the
- PibTerm Master Diskette:
-
- COPY B:PIBTERM.FON A: /V
- COPY B:PIBTERM.PRE A: /V
- COPY B:PIBTERM.CNF A: /V
-
- You can also copy any old translate tables or
- function key files to the PibTerm Master Diskette
- as well.
-
- Execute the program CNFUPDAT.EXE which will
- convert your PIBTERM.CNF file from earlier
- versions of PibTerm to that required for v4.1.
-
- For example,
-
- CNFUPDAT PIBTERM
-
- converts your old PIBTERM.CNF file to the new
- format. (The old file is renamed PIBTERM.CNO in
- case you want to keep a copy of it.)
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Appendix A Page 138 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Appendix A Page 138
-
-
- Erase CNFUPDAT.EXE from the PibTerm Master
- diskette after you finish the conversion.
-
- If you don't already have existing PibTerm
- configuration files:
-
- If you have a color graphics adapter and color
- monitor, rename PIBCOLOR.CNF to PIBTERM.CNF.
-
- If you have a monochrome adapter and monitor,
- rename PIBMONO.CNF to PIBTERM.CNF.
-
- If you have a color graphics adapter and a
- monochrome monitor, rename PIBBW.CNF to
- PIBTERM.CNF.
-
- PibTerm will create the remaining parameter files when
- you first execute it.
-
- You can erase any unused .CNF files from the PibTerm
- Master Diskette at this time.
-
- (6) You can boot from the PibTerm Master Diskette. To
- execute PibTerm after rebooting, just type
-
- PIBTERM
-
- Any missing configuration files will be created the
- first time you execute PibTerm.
-
-
- Dual-floppy system Dual-floppy system
-
- If one of your floppy drives allows a capacity of 720K or
- greater, then you can install PibTerm on it using the above
- instructions for a high-capacity single-floppy system,
- except that you won't have to physically swap floppies as
- often.
-
- For a dual-floppy system in which each diskette has only
- 360K available, proceed as follows ot install PibTerm.
-
- (1) Format TWO new diskettes using the DOS FORMAT command.
- Place the operating system on one so that you can boot
- from it:
-
- FORMAT A: /S <--- one with a system
- FORMAT B: <--- one without
-
- We will call the diskette with the operating system the
- PibTerm System Diskette. We will call the diskette
- without the system the PibTerm Overlay Diskette.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Appendix A Page 139 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Appendix A Page 139
-
-
- Copy the file COMMAND.COM from the PibTerm System
- Diskette to the PibTerm Overlay Diskette using the DOS
- copy command:
-
- COPY A:COMMAND.COM B: /V
-
- (2) Remove the PibTerm System Diskette from drive A: and
- put the diskette with PIBT41E1.ARC in drive A:. Most
- of the time the diskette containing PIBT41E1.ARC will
- also contain a dearchiving program like ARCE or PKXARC.
- If it doesn't, then put a copy of a dearchiver onto
- disk A:. For simplicity here, we'll assume that the
- dearchiver is Buerg's ARCE.
-
- Extract the contents PIBT41E1 on drive A: to diskette
- B:, the PibTerm Overlay Diskette:
-
- B:
- A:ARCE A:PIBT41E1
-
- (3) Remove the diskette with PIBT41E1.ARC from drive A:.
- Put the PibTerm System Diskette back in drive A:. Copy
- the following files from drive B: (the PibTerm Overlay
- Diskette) to drive A:
-
- COPY B:PIBTERM.EXE A: /V
- COPY B:*.2FL A: /V
-
- Erase these files from drive B:, along with a few
- others:
-
- ERASE B:PIBTERM.EXE
- ERASE B:*.2FL
- ERASE B:*.PIB
-
- (4) Rename the file CONFIG.2FL, now on the PibTerm System
- Diskette, to CONFIG.SYS:
-
- A:
- RENAME CONFIG.2FL CONFIG.SYS
-
- If you already have a CONFIG.SYS file that you normally
- use, then add the statements from CONFIG.2FL that
- aren't already present in your current CONFIG.SYS to
- your CONFIG.SYS on the PibTerm IT IS IMPORTANT that IT IS IMPORTANT
- the COMSPEC= from CONFIG.2FL be used instead of any
- currently in your present CONFIG.SYS.
-
- (5) Rename the file AUTOEXEC.2FL to AUTOEXEC.BAT.
-
- RENAME AUTOEXEC.2FL AUTOEXEC.BAT
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Appendix A Page 140 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Appendix A Page 140
-
-
- If you already use an AUTOEXEC.BAT, then add the
- statements from AUTOEXEC.2FL to your regular
- AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
-
- (6) Remove the PibTerm System Diskette from drive A: and
- place the diskette which contains PIBT41E2.ARC in drive
- A:. Extract the contents of PIBT41E2.ARC to the
- PibTerm Overlay Diskette in drive B:
-
- B:
- A:ARCE A:PIBT41E2
-
- The only file in PIBT41E2 is PIBTERM.OVR, the PibTerm
- overlay file.
-
- (7) If you already have existing configuration files from
- an earlier version of PibTerm, then proceed as follows:
-
- Copy the old configuration files onto the PibTerm
- Overlay Diskette at this time. For example, if
- you've previously backed up your old PibTerm
- configuration files to another diskette, then copy
- these files from your backup diskette to the
- PibTerm Master diskette. Place the diskette with
- the old PibTerm configuration files in drive A:
-
- COPY A:PIBTERM.FON B: /V
- COPY A:PIBTERM.PRE B: /V
- COPY A:PIBTERM.CNF B: /V
-
- You can also copy any old translate tables or
- function keys files to the PibTerm Overlay
- Diskette as well.
-
- Execute the program CNFUPDAT.EXE which will
- convert your PIBTERM.CNF file from earlier
- versions of PibTerm to that required for v4.1.
- For example,
-
- CNFUPDAT PIBTERM
-
- converts your old PIBTERM.CNF file to the new
- format. (The old file is renamed PIBTERM.CNO in
- case you want to keep a copy of it.)
-
- Erase CNFUPDAT.EXE from the PibTerm Overlay
- diskette after you finish the conversion.
-
- If you don't already have existing PibTerm
- configuration files:
-
- If you have a color graphics adapter and color
- monitor, rename PIBCOLOR.CNF to PIBTERM.CNF.
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Appendix A Page 141 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Appendix A Page 141
-
-
- If you have a monochrome adapter and monitor,
- rename PIBMONO.CNF to PIBTERM.CNF.
-
- If you have a color graphics adapter and a
- monochrome monitor, rename PIBBW.CNF to
- PIBTERM.CNF.
-
- PibTerm will create the remaining parameter files when
- you first execute it.
-
- You can erase any unused .CNF files from the PibTerm
- Overlay diskette at this time.
-
- (8) Replace the PibTerm System Diskette in drive A:. You
- can now reboot by striking <CTRL><ALT><DEL>. After
- rebooting, you can execute PibTerm by typing
-
- PIBTERM
-
- This setup allows you to keep drive A: completely open for
- file transfers, as only drive B: is needed by PibTerm for
- its overlays and other configuration files after initial
- program loading.
-
-
- Single-floppy system, 360K only Single-floppy system, 360K only
-
- As mentioned above, PibTerm is not designed for use on
- systems with only a single low-capacity floppy drive. If
- you really want to use PibTerm on such a system, you need a
- full 640K of RAM installed, and preferably 704K. (You CAN
- get 704K of usable memory with some memory boards, assuming
- that you DO NOT have an EGA or VGA.)
-
- Obtain a copy of a RAM disk program and install the RAM disk
- as drive B: with a 360K size. There are a number of good RAM
- disk programs available in the public domain, as well as
- commercial and shareware RAM disk programs. Follow the
- installation procedure given above for the two-floppy drive
- system, but using the RAM disk as the second drive. Copy
- the RAM disk contents to real diskettes whenever you
- "switch" the contents of the RAM disk with another diskette.
-
- To run PibTerm, modify your AUTOEXEC.BAT file or CONFIG.SYS
- file (depending upon your RAM drive software) to create a
- RAM disk big enough to hold the PIBTERM.OVR file. (300K
- should be enough.) After booting, copy PIBTERM.OVR to the
- RAM disk. Make sure the PATH statement in the AUTOEXEC.BAT
- file references both drive A: and the RAM drive B:
-
- PATH A:;B:
-
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Appendix A Page 142 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Appendix A Page 142
-
-
- When you execute PibTerm from drive A:, the overlays will be
- loaded from the RAM disk. You will have enough free space
- on drive A: to download small files.
-
- This setup is a VERY tight squeeze as regards RAM usage. You
- will need to reduce the sizes of PibTerm parameters like the
- review buffer size, file transfer buffer size, and input and
- output serial buffer size to an absolute minimum.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- /c -- program parameter,
- configuration file name, 120
- /d -- program parameter,
- dialing directory name, 120
- /e -- program parameter,
- dialing prefix file name, 120
- /k -- program parameter,
- function key file name, 120
- /l -- program parameter,
- log file name, 120
- /p -- program parameter,
- serial port number, 120
- /s -- program parameter,
- script to be executed, 120
- /t -- program parameter,
- translate file name, 120
- /x -- program parameter,
- requests overlays be placed in expanded memory, 120
- /x -- program parameter,
- requests overlays be placed in expanded memory, 121
- 132 column support in VT100 mode, 52
- requires ATI EGA/VGA card, 52
- <ALERT> -- displayed in mute mode in lieu of beep, 118
- <ALT> -- Starts PibTerm commands, 6
- <ALT>A -- Editing a line on screen, 118
- <ALT>B -- Sending a break, 26
- <ALT>C -- Clearing the screen, 51
- <ALT>D -- Dialing directory access, 27
- <ALT>E -- Toggling local/remote echo, 21
- <ALT>F -- File manipulation, 102
- <ALT>G -- Executing a script, 94
- <ALT>H -- Hanging up the phone, 83
- <ALT>I -- Displays PibTerm commands, 6
- <ALT>J -- Jump to DOS, 101
- <ALT>K -- Defining function keys, 109
- <ALT>K -- Manipulating function key definitions, 43
- <ALT>L -- Logging session to printer, 115
- <ALT>M -- Mute mode, 118
- <ALT>N -- Setting communications parameters quickly with, 21
- <ALT>O -- Capture session to disk, 115
- <ALT>P -- Changing PibTerm parameters, 8, 10
- <ALT>Q -- Redial last number dialed, 34
- <ALT>R -- Receive a file, 60
- <ALT>S -- Send a file, 60
- <ALT>T -- Translate received text, 118
- <ALT>U -- Screen image dump, 116
- <ALT>V -- Scanning review buffer, 117
- <ALT>W -- Host mode, 84
- <ALT>X -- Exiting PibTerm, 83
- <ALT>X -- Terminating script execution, 84, 94
- <ALT>Y -- Displaying session timers, 119, 125
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 144 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 144
-
-
- <ALT>Z -- Locating a dialing area code, 120
- <CTRL>P
- entering control codes with, 15
- <CTRL>T
- program interruption key on NOS, 69
- <CTRL>Y -- terminating job under VAX/VMS with, 70
- <CTRL>Z
- end of file marker, 77
- <SHIFT>TAB -- resetting current terminal emulation, 51
- @ -- marks PibTerm command in function key definition, 112
- ^
- entering control characters with, 15
- ^ -- entering control characters with, 112
- ` -- cause wait for next character, 112
- Access to DOS using <ALT>J, 101
- Access to remote system
- hard-wired, 16
- modem, 16
- ACNS mainframes
- communications settings for, 20
- dialing directory settings for, 29
- ACP File Extend Failed -- Vax/VMS message, 68
- Active directory, changing active at <ALT>F, 102
- ADDCOMMAND -- script command allows definition of new
- PibTerm commands, 123
- Adding line feeds in Gossip mode, 54
- Adding new PibTerm commands using ADDCOMMAND script command,
- 123
- ADM3a and ADM5 terminal emulation, 52
- AILU (asynchronous interface line unit)
- Accessing ACNS systems with, 26
- Defined, 17
- Alternate CTTY drivers, 89
- ANSI.SYS, 53
- ANSI/BBS terminal emulation, 52
- recommended for BBS use, 52
- ARCE.COM -- Vern Buerg's dearchiver, 133
- Area codes
- directory file PIBTERM.ACO, 120
- locating using <ALT>Z, 120
- ASCII
- defined, 18
- extended ASCII, 19
- file transfers -- see Non-protocol file transfer, 75
- on ACNS systems, 18
- on microcomputers, 18
- Asynchronous communications, 18
- AT command set, 17
- DIUs/AILUs do not use, 26
- suggested for use with PibTerm, 4
- AT&C1 -- modem command to set carrier detect normal, 24
- AT&D1 -- modem command to set data terminal ready line
- normal, 25
- AT&M0 -- modem command to disable MNP, 26
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 145 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 145
-
-
- AT&M4 -- modem command to enable MNP, 26
- ATDP -- modem command to dial on rotary phone line, 38
- ATDT -- modem command to dial on touch-tone phone line, 38
- ATE0 -- modem command turns off local echo, 22
- ATE1 -- modem command turns on local echo, 22
- ATH0 -- modem command to hang up phone, 83
- ATI EGA Wonder, 52, 122
- allows 132 columns in VT100, 52
- ATI VIP VGA, 52, 122
- allows 132 columns in VT100, 52
- ATTACH -- make direct file available for processing under
- NOS, 60
- Attaching a script to a function key, 114
- Attaching PibTerm commands to function keys, 113
- using @ character, 113
- ATZ -- modem command to reset modem, 40
- Autodownload
- Kermit, 64
- Mahoney BBS protocol, 72
- Ymodem for, on Mahoney BBS, 72
- Zmodem, 74
- Automatic dialing speed adjustment, 21, 36
- Automatic file name extraction for transfers, 75
- Automatic loading of function key definitions, 48
- Background processing, 3, 124
- Backing up
- old version of PibTerm, 133
- PIBTERM.FON, 35
- Backspace key, 41
- Ascii BS as backspace on Cyber, 42
- Ascii DEL as backspace on Vax, 42
- defining behavior of, 42
- dialing directory setting for, 29, 42
- Escape sequence ^[[OA as backspace on CMS, 42
- HARDWIRE.SCR sets for ACNS systems, 42
- Basic
- programs often reset communications ports, 101
- Batch file transfer
- in external file transfer protocols, 80
- Kermit as, 63
- Mahoney protocol as, 72
- Modem7 as, 71
- Telink as, 72
- Ymodem batch as, 71
- Zmodem as, 73
- Batch files, 73
- in external file transfer protocols, 73, 78, 80, 82
- RECZMOD.BAT for receiving files using Zmodem protocol,
- 73
- SENDZMOD.BAT for sending files using Zmodem protocol, 73
- Baud rate
- automatic adjustment of when dialing, 21, 36
- commonly used, 18
- current setting displayed on status line, 50
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 146 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 146
-
-
- defined, 18
- dialing directory entry for, 29
- settings for ACNS system, 20
- sub-sub-menu at <ALT>P, 12
- Bells
- turning off using <ALT>M, 118
- Binary files
- Cyber SPSSX Export files as example, 59
- defined, 59
- transferring with Kermit, 59
- Bits
- defined for communications, 17
- Block sequence error -- CDC/NOS Kermit message, 68
- Buerg, Vern
- Author of ARCE.COM, 133
- author of LIST.COM file viewer program, 108
- Burns, Philip "Pib"
- author of PibTerm program, 131
- BUSY
- modem status message indicates number dialed is busy,
- 37
- Byte stream transfers, 76
- Bytes
- defined for communications, 17
- Capturing PibTerm session, 115
- CA on status line tells if capture in progress, 50
- edited vs unedited capture, 116
- to disk with <ALT>O, 115
- Carrier detect line, 24
- CD shows current state on status line, 50
- defined, 24
- problems in dialing because of wrong setting, 39
- setting always high, 37
- setting for use in PibTerm, 24
- CD (carrier detect), 24, 50
- CDCNET
- terminating session under, 69
- CDCNOS.FNC -- function key definitions for NOS, 43, 47, 48
- CED
- Chris Dunford's keyboard enhancer, 16
- CGA, 55
- Changing PibTerm parameters, 8
- Character mode
- in Gossip, 53
- Characters
- defined for communications, 17
- Characters dropped
- from screen display, 130
- when dialing, 39
- Checksum, 56, 70
- use in file transfer protocol, 56
- CHKDSK -- DOS program to check disk and report available
- memory, 126
- Chris Dunford
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 147 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 147
-
-
- author of CED and PCED, 16
- Christensen protocol (Xmodem), 2
- Christensen, Ward, 2, 70
- Devised Xmodem protocol, 70
- Chuck Forsberg
- Author of Zmodem protocol, 73
- devised Ymodem protocol, 72
- Clear-to-send (CTS/RTS) flow control, 23
- CT gives current setting on status line, 50
- Clearing the screen with <ALT>C, 51
- Clink program
- implements SEALink file transfer protocol, 78
- Clone, 4, 42
- running PibTerm on PC clone, 4
- CMS, 41, 42, 46, 61, 119
- Kermit under, 61
- Using PibTerm with, 46
- CNFUPDAT.EXE -- Converts old PIBTERM.CNF to PibTerm v4.1
- format, 134, 137, 140
- Colors
- changing current settings of, 121
- changing VT100 colors, 122
- Command key for PibTerm command line mode, 123
- Command line mode, 123
- alternative to menu mode in PibTerm, 123
- defining command key, 123
- Commands
- list of PibTerm commands, 6
- Script commands allowed in command line mode, 123
- Communications, 18
- serial asynchronous, 18
- serial synchronous, 18
- Communications parameters, 17, 20
- baud rate
- defined, 18
- data bits
- Defined, 18
- parity
- defined, 19
- settings for ACNS mainframes, 20
- settings for microcomputers, 20
- submenu of <ALT>P, 11
- COMn, MSDOS serial port device name, 50
- Compuserve B Protocol, 74
- CONFIG.COM, 9, 133
- CONFIG.SYS -- Settings for use with PibTerm, 135
- Configuration files, 5
- PIBTERM.CNF, 9
- Conflicting programs, 125
- Connecting to remote system with PibTerm, 16
- Contents of function key definition strings, 112
- Control characters
- entering in strings with ^, 15
- Copy
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 148 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 148
-
-
- copying a file at <ALT>F, 102
- DOS COPY command, 36
- Getting a copy of PibTerm, 4
- Copying a file, at <ALT>F, 102
- CRC, 56, 70
- use in file transfer protocol, 56
- Creating mouse menu with MAKEMENU.COM, 7
- CTS/RTS (clear to send) flow control, 23, 75
- CTTY, 89
- alternate CTTY drivers, 89
- GATEWAY, 90
- IBMAUX, 90
- multitaskers may not support, 90
- Cursor shape
- changed to block for DOS jump, 101
- changed to block for overstrike editing mode, 15
- Cyber, 18, 29, 35, 41, 42, 47, 59, 60
- CYBER.SCR
- script for connecting to Cyber, 41
- Cyclic redundancy check (CRC), 56
- CYTOPC -- convert Cyber SPSSX export file for downloading,
- 61
- Data bits
- ASCII defined, 18
- current setting displayed on status line, 50
- defined, 18
- dialing directory entry for, 29
- Data terminal ready line, 24
- defined, 24
- Setting for use in PibTerm, 24
- Dataset ready (DSR/DTR) flow control, 23
- Date
- current, displayed at Y, 120
- date and time stamp in logging entries, 116
- of file creation
- in directory display at <ALT>F, 102
- in view-a-file at <ALT>F, 108
- in Ymodem protocol, 71
- of last connection to a system, 31
- of PibTerm release, 5
- DBBS, 70
- DECVAX.FNC -- function key definitions for Vax, 43
- DECVAXE.FNC -- function key definitions for Vax, 43, 45
- Default prefix and suffix
- dialing directory, 33
- Default terminal emulation is VT100, 41
- Defining function keys at <ALT>K, 109
- attaching a script to a function key, 114
- Attaching PibTerm commands to keys, 113
- Contents of key definition strings, 112
- displaying current definitions, 109
- Entering definitions at keyboard, 110
- extended keypad definitions, 111
- Quitting key definition, 112
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 149 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 149
-
-
- Reading key definitions from a file, 109
- Writing key definitions to a file, 111
- Delay
- inserting one-second delay in modem commands using ~, 40
- Deleting a file at <ALT>F, 102
- DesqView, multitasking program, 124
- graphics in background with, 55
- PIBTERM.DVP file for use with, 125
- DI3000, 2
- Dialing
- area code, locating one using <ALT>Z, 120
- list of numbers, 34
- long distance access codes, 33
- number in directory, 29
- preventing line drops during dialing attempts, 37
- problems, 38
- carrier detected before remote system answers phone,
- 39
- characters dropped when dialing, 39
- dialing fails because of rotary vs touch-tone
- conflict, 38
- dialing with MNP modem into non-MNP system, 25
- incorrect serial port, 38
- intermixed correct and junk characters after
- connection, 40
- modem timeout too small, 38
- problems in modem pools, 39
- searching for dialing entry, 35
- speed adjustments, 21
- system by name, 35
- using script NAMEDIAL.SCR, 98
- Dialing directory, 3
- add line feeds setting, 29
- backspace setting, 29
- baud rate setting, 29
- data bits setting, 29
- date and time of last connection to remote system in, 31
- default prefix and suffix, 33
- dialing a list of numbers, 34
- dialing an entry in, 29
- echo setting, 29
- file PIBTERM.FON, 27
- highlighted entry in, 29
- is memory resident, 27
- navigating through entries in, 29
- parity setting, 29
- phone number in, 29
- phone numbers in, 29
- prefixes and suffixes, 32
- revising, 33
- reducing size of, 121
- revising, 32
- script attached to dialing entry in, 31
- sections of, 29
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 150 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 150
-
-
- Setting up, 27
- settings for ACNS systems, 29
- short dialing prompt, 34
- Size, 3
- stop bits setting, 29
- terminal type, 29
- transfer type, 29
- Dialing speed
- automatic adjustment of when dialing, 36
- Direct screen writes
- disabling direct screen writes, 125
- Directory
- changing active at <ALT>F, 102
- displaying contents of at <ALT>F, 102
- Disabling direct screen writes, 125
- Disabling MNP, 25
- Displaying function key definitions, 109
- DIU (digital interface unit), 17, 26
- DOS, 64
- DOS, access to within PibTerm, 2, 101
- closing port before DOS jump, 101
- cursor changes shape, 101
- EXIT returns to PibTerm, 101
- Problems, 101
- DOS console output, 53
- Dumb terminal mode, 53
- Double-high, double wide characters in VT100, 52
- DoubleDos, multitasking program, 124
- Download directory
- contains downloaded files, 66
- setting, 66
- Downloading -- receiving a file, 60
- DROP,JSN
- NOS control statement to terminate job, 69
- Dropped characters
- in screen display, 130
- when dialing, 39
- DSR/DTR flow control, 23
- DSZ program, 78
- implements Zmodem protocol, 73
- DTR (data terminal ready), 24, 84
- problems if set HIGH instead of NORMAL, 25
- dropping to hang up phone, 83, 84
- used to hang up the phone, 25
- Dumb terminal mode, 52
- Dunford, Chris
- author of CED and PCED, 16
- Duplex
- full, 21
- full duplex file transfer protocol, 57
- half, 21
- half duplex file transfer protocol, 57
- Duplicated characters
- incorrectly displayed, 22
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 151 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 151
-
-
- EBCDIC
- defined, 19
- used on IBM mainframes, 19
- Echo
- changing with <ALT>E, 21
- current setting displayed on status line, 50
- defined, 21
- Dialing directory entry for, 29
- local echo, 21
- remote echo, 21
- all ACNS systems use remote echo, 21
- Edited capture session, 116
- Editing
- file, 103
- invoking external editor, 106, 108
- file, at <ALT>F, 102
- Keyboard, 14, 16
- line on screen, 118
- parameter entry text, 14
- parameter values, 14
- using DOS function $0A, 16
- Editor
- invoking external editor, 106
- PibTerm provides built-in full-screen editor, 3, 103
- EGA (enhanced graphics adapter), 52, 55, 120, 122
- changing screen size on, 122
- Elapsed time
- since current dialing session began, 119
- since PibTerm began execution, 119
- Emulation, terminal, 41
- defined, 1
- Enhanced keyboard, 42
- ENQUIRE,F -- NOS control statement to display local files,
- 64
- ENQUIRE,JSN
- NOS control statement to display active jobs, 69
- Entering function key definitions at keyboard, 110
- Erasing a file at <ALT>F, 102
- ESC, 7
- exiting a menu with, 7, 10
- Executing
- PibTerm, 5
- programs remotely in host mode, 89
- scripts with <ALT>G, 94
- EXIT, typing to return to PibTerm from DOS jump, 101
- Exiting PibTerm with <ALT>X, 83
- Expanded memory
- loading PibTerm overlays into, 121, 136
- FIDO, 70
- Tom Jennings bulletin board system, 72
- File editing, 103
- using built-in full-screen editor, 103
- File manipulation
- active directory change, 102
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 152 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 152
-
-
- at <ALT>F, 102
- copying a file, 102
- deleting a file, 102
- directory display, 102
- editing a file, 102, 103
- free space on drive, 102
- logged drive change, 102
- printing a file, 102
- viewing a file, 102, 107
- File names
- automatic extraction of in transfers, 75
- truncation of with Kermit protocol, 64
- File Transfer, 55, 74
- automatic extraction of file name in, 75
- Defined, 2
- non-protocol, 55
- protocol, 55
- Ascii transfers, 75
- dialing directory setting for, 29
- full duplex, 57
- half duplex, 57
- how protocol works, 56
- Kermit, 57
- Mahoney BBS batch protocol, 72
- Modem7, 71
- non-protocol transfers, 75
- Telink, 72
- Xmodem, 70
- Xmodem 1K, 71
- Xmodem 1K G, 71
- Ymodem, 71
- Zmodem, 73
- receiver, 56
- sender, 56
- statistics, 66
- Files
- PibTerm configuration, 5
- PIBTERM.CNF, 9
- transferring to and from remote systems, 55
- Types, 59
- Binary, 59
- Text, 59
- FINISH server request fails in Kermit, 69
- Flow control
- Clear-to-send (CTS/RTS), 23
- Dataset ready (DSR/DTR), 23
- DC1/DC3, 22
- defined, 22
- Xon/Xoff, 22
- Forsberg, Chuck
- Author of Zmodem protocol, 73
- Free space on drive, 102
- Freezing screen display with Scroll Lock Key, 51
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 153 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 153
-
-
- FROMMAC.SCR -- script to get files from Macintosh using
- Kermit, 65
- FSE -- full screen editor on NOS, 47
- Full duplex, 21
- conversation in Gossip mode, 53
- file transfer protocol, 57
- Full-screen editor, 103
- commands, 104
- Block commands, 105
- cursor movement, 104
- Insert and Delete, 105
- Miscellaneous, 106
- Quitting the editor, 106
- Search and Replace, 105
- maximum file size for editing is 65520 characters, 104
- Function keys
- loading a definition file at <ALT>K, 43
- setting up subdirectory for, 114
- GET -- make indirect file available for processing under
- NOS, 60
- GO TERMINAL
- turning off Vidtex inquiry on Compuserve, 74
- Gossip mode, 53
- Adding line feeds, 54
- disabling in host mode using <ALT>M, 118
- in host mode, 88
- Line mode versus character mode, 53
- Useful for transferring files between two individuals,
- 54
- Graphics terminal emulation -- Tek 4010, 54
- GSCRNDUM.DAT
- graphics screen dump file, 117
- Half duplex, 21
- file transfer protocol, 57
- Hanging up the phone with <ALT>H, 83
- Hard-wired access, 16, 26
- indicating connection is hard-wired, 26
- HARDWIRE.SCR, 41, 42, 43, 114
- script for connecting to ACNS mainframes, 26
- Hayes modems, 17
- Heap space
- work space available to PibTerm, 119
- problems when too little, 119
- Hercules graphics
- not supported by PibTerm, 55
- Host mode
- definition, 84
- executing programs remotely, 89
- external protocols in, 80
- file transfer menu, 89
- gossip mode in, 88
- initial messages, 85
- invoking with <ALT>W, 84
- main menu, 87
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 154 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 154
-
-
- multiple users, 90
- password, 85, 87
- echoed by dots for security, 87
- is case sensitive, 87
- PIBTERM.WEL welcome file, 91
- PIBTERM.XFR download list file, 91
- sending caller-to-caller mesaages in, 91
- single-user versus multiple-user access, 84
- starting host-mode session, 86
- status line in, 85
- superusers, 85
- user file PIBTERM.USF, 90
- user name, 85, 87
- welcome message, 86
- overprinting in, 86
- Host system
- PibTerm as, 3, 84
- IBBS, 89
- IBM, 29, 41
- IBM 3270, 46
- IBM 4361, 18, 19
- IBM 7171 protocol converter, 19
- IBM CMS, 46, 61
- Kermit under, 61
- IBM.SCR, 46
- IBMCMS.FNC -- function key definitions for IBM CMS, 43, 46
- IBMCMS.SCR
- script for connecting to IBM 4361, 41
- IBMCMSE.FNC -- function key definitions for IBM CMS, 43, 46
- Illegal ASCII character -- CDC/NOS Kermit message, 68
- Incorrect serial port
- causes dialing failure, 38
- Initialization string for modem, 24
- Insert mode
- in string editing, 15
- INSTALL.COM, 133
- INSTALL.COM program, 9
- Installing PibTerm, 4, 133
- dual-floppy system, 138
- non-ACNS installation instructions, 133
- on hard drive, 133
- on large capacity floppy, 133
- on single-floppy (>360K) system, 136
- single floppy system, 360K only, 141
- Using the ACNS INSTALL and CONFIG programs, 5
- Integrity information
- in file transfer protocol, 56
- Intercharacter delay
- in function key definitions, 113
- in modem commands, 40
- in non-protocol file transfer, 76
- Interline delay
- in non-protocol file transfer, 76
- Internal modem
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 155 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 155
-
-
- problems with, 128
- Jennings, Tom
- Author of FIDO bulletin board software, 72
- Jump to DOS using <ALT>J, 101
- Katz, Phil
- Author of PKXARC.COM, 133
- Kermit, 2, 57, 75
- aborts during a transfer, reasons for, 68
- autodownload with, 64
- between IBM PC and Apple Macintosh, 64
- Cyber
- attaching local files for transfer, 60
- saving files on, 64
- data compression in, 58
- defined, 57
- dialing directory entry for, 29
- executing on mainframes, 60
- indicating file type, 60
- long blocks, 58, 61
- activating, 61
- setting block size, 59, 66
- Macintosh programs providing, 65
- performance considerations, 58
- Problems
- FINISH server request fails, 69
- Kermit aborts during a transfer, 68
- Transfer never begins, 67
- Protocol parameters, 66
- quitting, 63
- receiving a file with, 61
- sending a file with, 61
- sends 8-bit data over 7-bit communications line, 58
- server, 58
- getting out of server mode, 63
- PibTerm does not acts as, 58
- Using PibTerm against, 58
- server mode, 61
- sliding windows, 58
- setting window size, 59, 66
- specifying file name to transfer, 63
- SPSSX Export files, 61
- Steps in using with PibTerm, 60
- under IBM CMS, 61
- Under NOS, 60
- Under VAX/VMS, 60
- Keyboards
- types of, on IBM PCs, 42
- Keypad definitions, 41, 109
- automatic loading of, 48
- contents of, 112
- displaying current, 109
- extended, 111
- intercharacter delays in, 113
- keyboard entry of, 110
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 156 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 156
-
-
- reading from a file, 109
- writing to a file, 111
- Learning a script, 95
- Line drops, preventing when dialing, 37
- Line feeds
- adding in Gossip mode, 54
- dialing directory setting for, 29
- LF on status line indicates if being added to CRs, 50
- Line mode
- in Gossip, 53
- Lines scrolled off screen, 3
- LIST.COM
- Vern Buerg's file viewer program, 108
- Loading a function key definition file at <ALT>K, 43
- Local echo, 21
- current setting displayed on status line, 50
- Logged drive
- changing at <ALT>F, 102
- Logging PibTerm session, 3
- date and time stamp in entries, 116
- LO on status line tells if logging active, 50
- to printer with <ALT>L, 115
- LOGIN.COM, 43
- startup commands for VAX/VMS, 43
- Long blocks
- in Kermit, 58
- setting block size, 59
- Long distance access codes, 33
- Lotus 123, 101
- LUIS, 41, 42, 100
- LUIS.SCR
- script for connecting to LUIS, 41
- Macintosh, 18, 20, 64
- MacKermit -- Kermit program for Apple Macintosh, 58, 65
- MacTerminal, 2
- Mahoney, Bob
- batch protocol on EXEC PC BBS, 72
- runs EXEC PC BBS in Milwaukee, Wisconsin, 72
- MAKEMENU.COM
- Microsoft-supplied mouse menu compiler, 7
- Maximum text line size
- in built-in PibTerm editor, 104
- in non-protocol file transfer, 77
- Meiners, Paul
- Author of MLink program, 78
- Memory problems in scripts, 97
- MENU
- Microsoft-supplied menu loader, 7
- Menus
- making selections, 6
- PibTerm menus, 4
- Using a mouse, 4
- Microcom Networking Protocol (MNP), 25
- Microcomputers
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 157 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 157
-
-
- communications settings for, 20
- emulating terminals with, 1
- Microsoft Windows, multitasking program, 124
- PibTerm runs poorly under, 124
- Missing features in VT100 emulation, 51
- Mitchell, Sammy
- author of QEdit, 104
- MLink program, 78, 83
- implements MegaLink file transfer protocol, 78
- implements MegaLink protocol, 78
- written by Paul Meiners, 78
- MNP error correction
- built-in to some modems, 25
- defined, 25
- must disable when calling ACNS mainframes, 25
- Modem, 16, 17, 24
- 9600 baud not yet standardized, 21
- accessing remote systems with, 16
- commands
- AT&C1 -- sets carrier detect normal, 24
- AT&D1 -- sets data terminal ready line normal, 25
- AT&M0 -- disables MNP, 26
- AT&M4 -- enables MNP, 26
- ATDP -- dial on rotary dial phone line, 38
- ATDT -- dial on touch tone phone line, 38
- ATE0 -- turns off modem local echo, 22
- ATE1 -- turns on modem local echo, 22
- ATH0 to hang up phone, 83
- constant PC-to-modem speed, 36
- dialing timeout too small causes dialing to fail, 38
- Hayes, 17
- Hayes compatible, 17
- initialization message, 5
- initialization string, 5, 25
- pools, 36, 39
- settings for use with PibTerm, 26
- types
- acoustic coupler, 16
- direct connect, 17
- Modem7 file transfer protocol, 71
- Mouse, 7
- button usage, 7
- menu
- loading mouse menu PIBTERM.MNU, 7
- sample for PibTerm, 8
- replacing cursor keys with, 8
- using with PibTerm, 7
- MSKERMIT.EXE -- Kermit program for MS DOS, 58
- Multitaskers, 3, 52, 69, 124
- and CTTY, 90
- DesqView, 55, 124
- Don't support 132 columns, 52
- Don't support graphics in background, 55
- DoubleDos, 124
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 158 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 158
-
-
- Microsoft Windows, 124
- PibTerm adjusts automatically to, 124
- TaskView, 124
- TopView, 124
- Music, ANSI/BBS mode plays, 52, 118
- turning off using <ALT>M, 118
- Mute mode using <ALT>M, 118
- Name, dialing a system by, 35
- NAMEDIAL.SCR -- script to dial a system by name, 98
- NO CARRIER
- modem status message indicates loss of carrier, 37
- Non-protocol file transfer, 75
- <CTRL>Z as end of file marker, 77
- buffering problems, 77
- byte stream transfer, 76
- defined, 55
- displaying text transferred, 77
- intercharacter delay, 76
- interline delay, 76
- maximum text line size is 255 characters, 77
- pacing character, 76
- sending blanks for empty lines, 77
- stopping receive with <ALT>R, 77
- translating received text, 78
- NOS, 18, 47, 69, 70, 119
- SAVE -- saving local files as permanent, 64
- Using PibTerm with, 47
- NOS/VE, 18, 70
- Null modem adapter, 65
- connecting Macintosh and IBM PC, 65
- Omen Technology
- commercial source for Zmodem modules, 73
- OPUS BBS, 41, 70, 126
- communications drivers may interfere with PibTerm, 41,
- 126
- Overlay file PIBTERM.OVR, 121
- Overstrike mode
- in string editing, 15
- Pacing character
- in non-protocol transfer, 76
- PACX
- defined, 26
- Parameters
- Changes for different ACNS system, 41
- Changing PibTerm, 8
- configuration file
- reading a new one at <ALT>P, 13
- writing a new at <ALT>P, 13
- Saving changes at <ALT>P, 131
- Parity
- bit, 19
- checking, 19
- current setting displayed on status line, 50
- defined, 19
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 159 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 159
-
-
- dialing directory entry for, 29
- types
- Even, 19
- Mark, 19
- No parity, 20
- Odd, 19
- Space, 19
- Password
- in host mode, 85
- PATH
- importance of DOS PATH= to external file transfer
- protocols, 82
- importance of in loading PibTerm overlays, 127
- setting DOS Path for use with PibTerm, 129, 136, 141
- Paul Meiners
- Author of MLink program, 78
- PC Board, 70, 95
- PC Host, 70
- PC Pursuit, 37
- PC-to-PC transfers
- host mode, 89
- using gossip mode, 54
- PCED
- Chris Dunford's keyboard enhancer, 16
- PCKermit program
- implements sliding windows Kermit, 78
- PCTOCY -- convert SPSS/PC export files after uploading to
- Cyber, 61
- PgDn -- defined as Kermit receive in ACNS function key
- files, 113
- PgDn -- defined as Kermit receives in ACNS function key
- files, 60, 61
- PgUp -- defined as Kermit send in ACNS function key files,
- 60, 61, 113
- Phil Katz
- Author of PKXARC.COM dearchiving program, 133
- Philip "Pib" Burns
- author of PibTerm program, 131
- Phone number
- in dialing directory, 29
- PibTerm commands, 6
- script commands, 123
- scripts, 91
- PibTerm program parameters, 120
- PIBTERM.ACO -- area code directory, 120
- PIBTERM.CNF -- primary PibTerm configuration file, 9
- editing with a text editor, 9
- format of entries, 9
- Parameters Reference Manual, 9
- PIBTERM.DVP file for use with DesqView, 125
- PIBTERM.FON -- dialing directory file, 27
- backing up, 35
- PIBTERM.LOG
- in host mode, 84
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 160 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 160
-
-
- log file in emulation mode, 116
- PIBTERM.OVR -- PibTerm program overlay file, 121
- PIBTERM.TRA -- character translation file, 118
- PIBTERM.USF -- PibTerm host mode user file, 90
- PIBTERM.WEL -- welcome file for host mode, 91
- PIBTERM.XFR -- file names for download in host mode, 91
- PKXARC.COM -- Phil Katz' dearchiver, 133
- Prefix, default
- dialing directory, 33
- Premature dialing termination
- modem timeout too small as cause, 38
- Preventing line drops when dialing, 37
- Print spooler, 125
- Printer
- lock ups, 115
- logging PibTerm session to with <ALT>L, 115
- PR on status line tells if printer logging in
- effect, 50
- print spoolers as source of conflicts with PibTerm, 125
- printing a file from within PibTerm, 102, 125
- setup string, 115
- PRN
- MSDOS printer device, 115
- Problems
- Communications proceed but VERY slowly, 129
- Dialing, 38
- carrier detected before remote system answers, 39
- characters dropped, 39
- incorrect serial port, 38
- intermixed good and bad characters after connection,
- 40
- modem pools, 39
- modem timeout too small, 38
- rotary vs. touch-tone line conflict, 38
- display "snows" badly, 130
- DOS jump fails, 101
- dropped characters in screen display, 130
- duplicated characters, 22
- Jump to DOS fails, 129
- Kermit, 67
- aborts during a transfer, 68
- FINISH server request fails, 69
- Transfer never begins, 67
- menus not cleared correctly, 127
- multicolor junk appears on screen, 127
- no communications at all, 127
- Overlay file not found, 127
- PibTerm hangs at startup time, 126
- printer
- systems locks up when <ALT>L chosen, 115
- programs which conflict with PibTerm, 125
- Scripts
- with memory, 97
- too little heap space, 120
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 161 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 161
-
-
- with internal modems, 128
- Program line
- PibTerm parameters on, 120
- Programs which conflict with PibTerm, 125
- BBS communications drivers, 126
- keyboard enhancers, 125
- on-screen clocks, 125
- print spoolers, 125
- Protocol converter
- IBM 7171, 19
- Protocol parameters for Kermit, 66
- Protocol transfer
- defined, 55
- how protocol works, 56
- Kermit, 57
- Qedit -- Sammy Mitchell's editor, 104, 107
- Quitting function key definition, 112
- Quitting PibTerm with <ALT>X, 83
- RAM disk, 4, 121, 141
- installing PibTerm with, 141
- placing PibTerm files on, 121
- RBBS, 70, 89
- RCPM, 70
- Reading a new parameters file, 13
- Reading function key definitions from a file, 109
- RECMLINK.BAT
- receive file using MegaLink protocol, 80, 81, 83
- RECZMOD.BAT
- MS DOS batch file to receive file using Zmodem, 73
- Redialing last number dialed, 34
- outside dialing menu with <ALT>Q, 34
- within dialing menu with Q, 34
- RedRyder
- provides Kermit on Macintosh, 65
- Remote echo, 21
- Remote execution of programs in host mode, 89
- Repeat/Until loop in scripts, 93
- Request to send (RTS), 23
- Requirements
- hardware and software for running PibTerm, 4
- Resetting terminal emulation with <SHIFT>TAB, 51
- Review buffer, 3
- Changing review buffer size, 117
- does not take account of escape sequences, 117
- Lines scrolled off screen, 3
- maximum size is 32767 characters, 117
- Scanning with <ALT>V, 117
- Revising dialing directory
- dialing entry, 32
- dialing prefixes and suffixes, 33
- Rotary dial phone line, 38
- Sammy Mitchell
- author of QEdit, 104
- SAS/GRAPH, 2
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 162 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 162
-
-
- SAVE -- saving local file as permanent under NOS, 64
- Screen display
- changing size of, 122
- clearing with <ALT>C, 51
- Freezing with Scroll Lock Key, 51
- Screen dumps, 116
- to GSCRNDUM.DAT in graphics mode, 117
- to SCRNDUMP.DAT in text mode, 116
- SCREEN,VT100 -- sets VT100 mode on NOS, 47
- Scripts, 2, 91
- attached to dialing directory entries, 31
- attaching to a function key, 114
- Command line mode as special form of, 123
- Commands allowed in command line mode, 123
- currently executing displayed on status line, 50
- defined, 91
- executing with <ALT>G, 94
- learning a script automatically, 95
- memory problems, 97
- programming language, 91
- Repeat/Until loop, 93
- sample
- CYBER.SCR for connecting to Cyber, 41
- dialing by name, 98
- FROMMAC.SCR, 65
- HARDWIRE.SCR -- connect to ACNS system via hard-
- wired line, 26
- IBMCMS.SCR for connecting to IBM, 41
- LUIS.SCR for connecting to LUIS, 41
- TOMAC.SCR, 65
- VAX.SCR for connecting to Vax, 41
- VAX.SCR for logging into Vax, 92
- security considerations, 94
- Setting PibTerm parameters with, 41
- Stext -- sends text to remote system, 92
- terminating execution with <ALT>X, 94
- unloading scripts from memory, 98
- Waitstring -- waits for string from remote system, 93
- SCRNDUMP.DAT -- text screen dump file, 116
- Scroll Lock Key, 51
- Searching for dialing entry at <ALT>D, 35
- Security considerations with scripts, 94
- SemWare -- address of, for QEdit, 104
- SENDMLINK.BAT
- send file using MegaLink protocol, 80, 81, 83
- SENDXMOD.BAT
- MS DOS batch file to send file using Zmodem, 73
- Sequence information
- in file transfer protocol, 56
- Serial cable, 24
- Serial communications, 18
- Serial port, 16
- current one in use displayed on status line, 50
- Server mode in Kermit, 61
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 163 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 163
-
-
- Session logging, 115
- Activating PIBTERM.LOG file, 116
- special information lines, 116
- SET FILE BINARY
- sets remote Kermit to use binary file type, 61
- SET PIBTERM=
- sets home directory for PibTerm files, 135
- SET TERMINAL/VT100
- placing into LOGIN.COM, 43
- sets VT100 terminal type for Vax/VMS, 43
- Setting a download directory, 66
- Setting a function key subdirectory, 114
- Setting carrier detect always high, 37
- Setting up dialing directory, 27
- Setting up modem for use with PibTerm, 23
- Shareware, 73, 78, 90, 104, 108
- Short dialing prompt at <ALT>D, 34
- Simulated double-high, double wide characters in VT100, 52
- Sliding windows
- in Kermit, 58
- setting window size, 59
- Sound effects
- turning off using <ALT>M, 118
- Speed of communications (baud rate), 18
- Speeding up PibTerm access, 121
- Split-screen mode, 53
- SPSSX Export files, 59
- are binary files under CDC NOS, 59
- Starting a host-mode session, 86
- Starting PibTerm execution, 5
- Startup display
- PibTerm initial, 5
- Status line
- disabling display of, 50
- in host mode, 85
- in terminal emulation, 49
- not displayed in Tek 4010 emulation mode, 51
- SText -- script command to send text to remote system, 92
- STOP /ID= -- VAX/VMS control statement to terminate job, 70
- Stop bits, 20
- current setting displayed on status line, 50
- dialing directory entry for, 29
- Stuttered (duplicated) characters, 22
- Suffix, default
- dialing directory, 33
- SuperKermit (sliding windows Kermit), 58
- Superusers
- in PibTerm host mode, 85
- Switching between VT100 keypad modes, 48
- Synchronous communications, 18
- TaskView, multitasking program, 124
- TASKVIEW.NOT file for use with TaskView, 125
- TCOMM, 70
- Tek 4010, 1, 120
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 164 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 164
-
-
- graphics terminal emulation, 54
- status line not displayed when emulating, 51
- Telenet, 37
- Telink, 72
- Terminal emulation, 41
- ADM3a, 52
- ADM5, 52
- ANSI/BBS, 52
- defined, 1
- dialing directory setting for, 29
- Dumb terminal emulation, 1, 52
- output through MS DOS, 52
- Gossip mode, 53
- Split-screen mode, 53
- resetting current with <SHIFT>TAB, 51
- Smart, 1
- status line in, 49
- Tek 4010, 1, 54
- Tek 4014, 53
- Tek 4105, 53
- TV925, 52
- VT100, 1
- VT52, 52
- Terminating CDCNET session with ESC <CTRL>A CTRL<T>, 69
- Terminating execution of a script with <ALT>X, 94
- Terminating VAX/VMS program with <CTRL>Y, 70
- Text files, 59
- Time
- current, displayed at Y, 120
- date and time stamp in logging entries, 116
- elapsed since current dialing session began, at <ALT>Y,
- 119
- elapsed since PibTerm began execution, at <ALT>Y, 119
- of file creation
- in directory display at <ALT>F, 102
- in view-a-file at <ALT>F, 108
- in Ymodem protocol, 71
- of last connection to a system, 31
- time of day, displayed on status line, 50
- TOMAC.SCR -- script to send files from IBM PC to Macintosh
- using Kermit, 65
- TopView, multitasking program, 124
- Touch-tone phone line, 38
- Transfer never begins with Kermit, 67
- Transfer statistics, 66
- Translating incoming text with <ALT>T, 78, 118
- TV925 terminal emulation, 52
- extremely limited, 52
- Types of files, 59
- Unedited capture session, 116
- Unloading scripts from memory, 98
- Uploading -- sending a file, 60
- User name in host mode, 85
- User-defined commands
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 165 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 165
-
-
- in command line mode, 124
- Using expanded memory for PibTerm overlays, 121
- Vax, 18, 29, 33, 41, 42, 43, 60, 70, 92, 95, 97
- VAX.SCR
- script for connecting to Vax, 41
- Vax/VMS, 43
- Vern Buerg
- Author of ARCE.COM dearchiving program, 133
- author of LIST.COM file viewer program, 108
- VersaTerm Pro
- provides Kermit on Macintosh, 65
- Version number of PibTerm, 5
- VGA, 52, 55, 122
- changing screen size on, 122
- Vidtex, turning off Compuserve inquiry for, 74
- Viewing a file at <ALT>F, 102, 107
- invoking external file viewer, 108
- VMS, 43, 60
- VMS Kermit, 60
- VT100, 1, 43, 46, 48
- changing colors in VT100 emulation mode, 122
- default terminal emulation, 41
- double high, double wide character, 52
- keypad definitions, 42
- missing features in PibTerm's emulation of, 51
- setting terminal type as under IBM CMS, 46
- setting terminal type as under Vax/VMS, 43
- switching between keypad modes, 48
- VT52 terminal emulation, 52
- WaitString -- script command to wait for string from remote
- system, 93
- Welcome message in host mode, 86
- Word-processing documents, 59
- WordPerfect, 59, 101
- Writing a new configuration file, 13
- Writing function key definitions to a file, 111
- Xmodem, 2, 70
- Timing constraints, 70
- Xmodem 1K, 71
- Xmodem 1K G, 71
- Xon/Xoff flow control, 22, 75
- XO gives current setting on status line, 50
- Ymodem, 71
- Ymodem G, 71
- Zapping a file at <ALT>F, 102
- Zmodem, 71, 73
- autodownload with, 74
- | -- insert carriage return
- in function key string, 112
- in SText script command, 93
- ~
- insert one-second delay
- in modem command string, 40
- ~ -- insert one-second delay
-
-
- A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 166 A Guide to PibTerm v4.1 Index Page 166
-
-
- in function key string, 112
-